Patent Application
20240024445
The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted via Patent Center and is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The accompanying sequence listing .XML file name GSO-006D2, was created on 7 Nov. 2022, and is 538 kb in size.
Therapeutic vaccines based on tumor-specific neoantigens hold great promise as a next-generation of personalized cancer immunotherapy.1-3 Cancers with a high mutational burden, such as non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) and melanoma, are particularly attractive targets of such therapy given the relatively greater likelihood of neoantigen generation.4,5 Early evidence shows that neoantigen-based vaccination can elicit T-cell responses6 and that neoantigen targeted cell-therapy can cause tumor regression under certain circumstances in selected patients.7
One question for neoantigen vaccine design is which of the many coding mutations present in subject tumors can generate the “best” therapeutic neoantigens, e.g., antigens that can elicit anti-tumor immunity and cause tumor regression.
Initial methods have been proposed incorporating mutation-based analysis using next-generation sequencing, RNA gene expression, and prediction of MHC binding affinity of candidate neoantigen peptides8. However, these proposed methods can fail to model the entirety of the epitope generation process, which contains many steps (e.g., TAP transport, proteasomal cleavage, and/or TCR recognition) in addition to gene expression and MHC binding9. Consequently, existing methods are likely to suffer from reduced low positive predictive value (PPV). (
Indeed, analyses of peptides presented by tumor cells performed by multiple groups have shown that <5% of peptides that are predicted to be presented using gene expression and MHC binding affinity can be found on the tumor surface MHC10,11 (
This low positive predictive value (PPV) of existing methods for predicting presentation presents a problem for neoantigen-based vaccine design. If vaccines are designed using predictions with a low PPV, most patients are unlikely to receive a therapeutic neoantigen and fewer still are likely to receive more than one (even assuming all presented peptides are immunogenic). Thus, neoantigen vaccination with current methods is unlikely to succeed in a substantial number of subjects having tumors. (
Additionally, previous approaches generated candidate neoantigens using only cis-acting mutations, and largely neglected to consider additional sources of neo-ORFs, including mutations in splicing factors, which occur in multiple tumor types and lead to aberrant splicing of many genes13, and mutations that create or remove protease cleavage sites.
Finally, standard approaches to tumor genome and transcriptome analysis can miss somatic mutations that give rise to candidate neoantigens due to suboptimal conditions in library construction, exome and transcriptome capture, sequencing, or data analysis. Likewise, standard tumor analysis approaches can inadvertently promote sequence artifacts or germline polymorphisms as neoantigens, leading to inefficient use of vaccine capacity or auto-immunity risk, respectively.
In addition to the challenges of current neoantigen prediction methods certain challenges also exist with the available vector systems that can be used for neoantigen delivery in humans, many of which are derived from humans. For example, many humans have pre-existing immunity to human viruses as a result of previous natural exposure, and this immunity can be a major obstacle to the use of recombinant human viruses for neoantigen delivery for cancer treatment.
Disclosed herein is a composition for delivery of a neoantigen expression system, comprising: the neoantigen expression system, wherein the neoantigen expression system comprises one or more vectors, the one or more vectors comprising: (a) an RNA alphavirus backbone, wherein the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises: (i) at least one promoter nucleotide sequence, and (ii) at least one polyadenylation (poly(A)) sequence; and (b) a neoantigen cassette, wherein the neoantigen cassette comprises: (i) at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence derived from a tumor present within a subject, comprising: (I) at least one tumor-specific and subject-specific MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence derived from the tumor, and comprising: (A) a MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence with at least one alteration that makes the encoded peptide sequence distinct from the corresponding peptide sequence encoded by a wild-type nucleic acid sequence, and (B) optionally, a 5′ linker sequence, and (C) optionally, a 3′ linker sequence; (ii) optionally, a second promoter nucleotide sequence operably linked to the neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence; and (iii) optionally, at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence; (iv) optionally, at least one nucleic acid sequence encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker sequence (SEQ ID NO:56); and (v) optionally, at least one second poly(A) sequence, wherein the second poly(A) sequence is a native poly(A) sequence or an exogenous poly(A) sequence to the alphavirus.
Also disclosed herein is a composition for delivery of a neoantigen expression system, comprising: the neoantigen expression system, wherein the neoantigen expression system comprises one or more vectors, the one or more vectors comprising: (a) an RNA alphavirus backbone, wherein the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises the nucleic acid sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:6, wherein the RNA alphavirus backbone sequence comprises a 26S promoter nucleotide sequence and a poly(A) sequence, wherein the 26S promoter sequence is endogenous to the RNA alphavirus backbone, and wherein the poly(A) sequence is endogenous to the RNA alphavirus backbone; and (b) a neoantigen cassette integrated between the 26S promoter nucleotide sequence and the poly(A) sequence, wherein the neoantigen cassette comprises: (i) at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence derived from a tumor present within a subject, comprising: (I) at least 10 tumor-specific and subject-specific MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences linearly linked to each other and each comprising: (A) a MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence with at least one alteration that makes the encoded peptide sequence distinct from the corresponding peptide sequence encoded by a wild-type nucleic acid sequence, wherein the MHC I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence encodes a MHC class I epitope 7-15 amino acids in length, (B) a 5′ linker sequence, wherein the 5′ linker sequence encodes a native N-terminal amino acid sequence of the MHC I epitope, and wherein the 5′ linker sequence encodes a peptide that is at least 3 amino acids in length, (C) a 3′ linker sequence, wherein the 3′ linker sequence encodes a native N-terminal acid sequence of the MHC I epitope, and wherein the 3′ linker sequence encodes a peptide that is at least 3 amino acids in length, and wherein the neoantigen cassette is operably linked to the 26S promoter nucleotide sequence, wherein each of the MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encodes a polypeptide that is between 13 and 25 amino acids in length, and wherein each 3′ end of each MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is linked to the 5′ end of the following MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence with the exception of the final MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence in the neoantigen cassette; and (ii) at least two MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences comprising: (I) a PADRE MHC class II sequence (SEQ ID NO:48), (II) a Tetanus toxoid MHC class II sequence (SEQ ID NO:46), (III) a first nucleic acid sequence encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker sequence (SEQ ID NO: 56) linking the PADRE MHC class II sequence and the Tetanus toxoid MHC class II sequence, (IV) a second nucleic acid sequence encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker sequence (SEQ ID NO: 56) linking the 5′ end of the at least two MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences to the at least 20 tumor-specific and subject-specific MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences, (V) optionally, a third nucleic acid sequence encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker sequence (SEQ ID NO: 56) at the 3′ end of the at least two MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences.
In some aspects, an ordered sequence of each element of the neoantigen cassette is described in the formula, from 5′ to 3′, comprising:
Pa-(L5b-Nc-L3d)X-(G5e-Uf)Y-G3g
wherein P comprises the second promoter nucleotide sequence, where a=0 or 1, N comprises one of the MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequences, where c=1, L5 comprises the 5′ linker sequence, where b=0 or 1, L3 comprises the 3′ linker sequence, where d=0 or 1, G5 comprises one of the at least one nucleic acid sequences encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker (SEQ ID NO: 56), where e=0 or 1, G3 comprises one of the at least one nucleic acid sequences encoding a GPGPG amino acid linker (SEQ ID NO: 56), where g=0 or 1, U comprises one of the at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence, where f=1, X=1 to 400, where for each X the corresponding Nc is a epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence, and Y=0, 1, or 2, where for each Y the corresponding Uf is an antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, for each X the corresponding Nc is a distinct MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, for each Y the corresponding Uf is a distinct MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence.
In some aspects, a=0, b=1, d=1, e=1, g=1, h=1, X=20, Y=2, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence is a single 26S promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone, the at least one polyadenylation poly(A) sequence is a poly(A) sequence of at least 100 consecutive A nucleotides provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone, each N encodes a MHC class I epitope 7-15 amino acids in length, L5 is a native 5′ linker sequence that encodes a native N-terminal amino acid sequence of the MHC I epitope, and wherein the 5′ linker sequence encodes a peptide that is at least 3 amino acids in length, L3 is a native 3′ linker sequence that encodes a native nucleic-terminal acid sequence of the MHC I epitope, and wherein the 3′ linker sequence encodes a peptide that is at least 3 amino acids in length, U is each of a PADRE class II sequence and a Tetanus toxoid MHC class II sequence, the RNA alphavirus backbone is the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:6, and each of the MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encodes a polypeptide that is between 13 and 25 amino acids in length.
In some aspects, any of the above compositions further comprise a nanoparticulate delivery vehicle. The nanoparticulate delivery vehicle, in some aspects, may be a lipid nanoparticle (LNP). In some aspects, the LNP comprises ionizable amino lipids. In some aspects, the ionizable amino lipids comprise MC3-like (dilinoleylmethyl-4-dimethylaminobutyrate) molecules. In some aspects, the nanoparticulate delivery vehicle encapsulates the neoantigen expression system.
In some aspects, any of the above compositions further comprise a plurality of LNPs, wherein the LNPs comprise: the neoantigen expression system; a cationic lipid; a non-cationic lipid; and a conjugated lipid that inhibits aggregation of the LNPs, wherein at least about 95% of the LNPs in the plurality of LNPs either: have a non-lamellar morphology; or are electron-dense.
In some aspects, the non-cationic lipid is a mixture of (1) a phospholipid and (2) cholesterol or a cholesterol derivative.
In some aspects, the conjugated lipid that inhibits aggregation of the LNPs is a polyethyleneglycol (PEG)-lipid conjugate. In some aspects, the PEG-lipid conjugate is selected from the group consisting of: a PEG-diacylglycerol (PEG-DAG) conjugate, a PEG dialkyloxypropyl (PEG-DAA) conjugate, a PEG-phospholipid conjugate, a PEG-ceramide (PEG-Cer) conjugate, and a mixture thereof. In some aspects the PEG-DAA conjugate is a member selected from the group consisting of: a PEG-didecyloxypropyl (C10) conjugate, a PEG-dilauryloxypropyl (C12) conjugate, a PEG-dimyristyloxypropyl (C14) conjugate, a PEG-dipalmityloxypropyl (C16) conjugate, a PEG-distearyloxypropyl (C18) conjugate, and a mixture thereof.
In some aspects, the neoantigen expression system is fully encapsulated in the LNPs.
In some aspects, the non-lamellar morphology of the LNPs comprises an inverse hexagonal (H11) or cubic phase structure.
In some aspects, the cationic lipid comprises from about 10 mol % to about 50 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the cationic lipid comprises from about 20 mol % to about 50 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the cationic lipid comprises from about 20 mol % to about 40 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, the non-cationic lipid comprises from about 10 mol % to about 60 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the non-cationic lipid comprises from about 20 mol % to about 55 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the non-cationic lipid comprises from about 25 mol % to about 50 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, the conjugated lipid comprises from about 0.5 mol % to about 20 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the conjugated lipid comprises from about 2 mol % to about 20 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs. In some aspects, the conjugated lipid comprises from about 1.5 mol % to about 18 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, greater than 95% of the LNPs have a non-lamellar morphology. In some aspects, greater than 95% of the LNPs are electron dense.
In some aspects, any of the above compositions further comprise a plurality of LNPs, wherein the LNPs comprise: a cationic lipid comprising from 50 mol % to 65 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; a conjugated lipid that inhibits aggregation of LNPs comprising from 0.5 mol % to 2 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; and a non-cationic lipid comprising either a mixture of a phospholipid and cholesterol or a derivative thereof, wherein the phospholipid comprises from 4 mol % to 10 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs and the cholesterol or derivative thereof comprises from 30 mol % to 40 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; a mixture of a phospholipid and cholesterol or a derivative thereof, wherein the phospholipid comprises from 3 mol % to 15 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs and the cholesterol or derivative thereof comprises from 30 mol % to 40 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; or up to 49.5 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs and comprising a mixture of a phospholipid and cholesterol or a derivative thereof, wherein the cholesterol or derivative thereof comprises from 30 mol % to 40 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, any of the above compositions further comprise a plurality of LNPs, wherein the LNPs comprise: a cationic lipid comprising from 50 mol % to 85 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; a conjugated lipid that inhibits aggregation of LNPs comprising from 0.5 mol % to 2 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs; and a non-cationic lipid comprising from 13 mol % to 49.5 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, the phospholipid comprises dipalmitoylphosphatidylcholine (DPPC), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), or a mixture thereof.
In some aspects, the conjugated lipid comprises a polyethyleneglycol (PEG)-lipid conjugate. In some aspects, the PEG-lipid conjugate comprises a PEG-diacylglycerol (PEG-DAG) conjugate, a PEG-dialkyloxypropyl (PEG-DAA) conjugate, or a mixture thereof. In some aspects, the PEG-DAA conjugate comprises a PEG-dimyristyloxypropyl (PEG-DMA) conjugate, a PEG-distearyloxypropyl (PEG-DSA) conjugate, or a mixture thereof. In some aspects, the PEG portion of the conjugate has an average molecular weight of about 2,000 daltons.
In some aspects, the conjugated lipid comprises from 1 mol % to 2 mol % of the total lipid present in the LNPs.
In some aspects, the LNP comprises a compound having a structure of Formula I:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer, prodrug or stereoisomer thereof, wherein: L1 and L2 are each independently −0(C═0)-, —(C=0)0-, —C(═0)-, −0-, —S(0)x-, —S—S—, —C(═0)S—, —SC(═0)-, —RaC(=0)-, —C(═0) Ra—, —RaC(═0) Ra—, —OC(═0) R—, —RaC(═0)0- or a direct bond; G1 is Ci-C2 alkylene, —(C═0)-, −0(C=0)-, —SC(═0)-, —RaC(═0)- or a direct bond: —C(═0)-, —(C=0)0-, —C(═0)S—, —C(═0) Ra— or a direct bond; G is C1-C6 alkylene; Ra is H or C1-C12 alkyl; R1a and R1b are, at each occurrence, independently either: (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl; or (b) R1a is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R1b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R1b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R2 and R2b are, at each occurrence, independently either: (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl; or (b) R2 is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R2b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R2b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R3a and R3b are, at each occurrence, independently either (a): H or C1-C12 alkyl; or (b) R1 is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R3b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; Ra and Rb are, at each occurrence, independently either: (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl; or (b) R1 is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R1 together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R1 and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R5 and R6 are each independently H or methyl; R7 is C4-C20 alkyl; R8 and R9 are each independently C1-C12 alkyl; or R8 and R9, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 5, 6 or 7-membered heterocyclic ring; a, b, c and d are each independently an integer from 1 to 24; and x is 0, 1 or 2.
In some aspects, the LNP comprises a compound having a structure of Formula II:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer, prodrug or stereoisomer thereof, wherein: L1 and L2 are each independently −0(C═O)—, —(C=0)0- or a carbon-carbon double bond; R1a and R1b are, at each occurrence, independently either (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl, or (b) R1a is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R1b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R1b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R2a and R2b are, at each occurrence, independently either (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl, or (b) R2a is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R2b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R2b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R3a and R3b are, at each occurrence, independently either (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl, or (b) R3a is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R3b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R3b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R4a and R4b are, at each occurrence, independently either (a) H or C1-C12 alkyl, or (b) R4a is H or C1-C12 alkyl, and R4b together with the carbon atom to which it is bound is taken together with an adjacent R4b and the carbon atom to which it is bound to form a carbon-carbon double bond; R5 and R6 are each independently methyl or cycloalkyl; R7 is, at each occurrence, independently H or C1-C12 alkyl; R8 and R9 are each independently unsubstituted C1-C12 alkyl; or R8 and R9, together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, form a 5, 6 or 7-membered heterocyclic ring comprising one nitrogen atom; a and d are each independently an integer from 0 to 24; b and c are each independently an integer from 1 to 24; and e is 1 or 2, provided that: at least one of R1a, R2a, R3a or R4a is C1-C12 alkyl, or at least one of L1 or L2 is −0(C═0)- or —(C=0)0-; and R1a and R1b are not isopropyl when a is 6 or n-butyl when a is 8.
In some aspects, any of the above compositions further comprise one or more excipients comprising a neutral lipid, a steroid, and a polymer conjugated lipid. In some aspects, the neutral lipid comprises at least one of 1,2-Distearoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DSPC), 1,2-Dipalmitoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DPPC), 1,2-Dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DMPC), 1-Palmitoyl-2-oleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (POPC), 1,2-dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine (DOPC), and 1,2-Dioleoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DOPE). In some aspects, the neutral lipid is DSPC.
In some aspects, the molar ratio of the compound to the neutral lipid ranges from about 2:1 to about 8:1.
In some aspects, the steroid is cholesterol. In some aspects, the molar ratio of the compound to cholesterol ranges from about 2:1 to 1:1.
In some aspects, the polymer conjugated lipid is a pegylated lipid. In some aspects, the molar ratio of the compound to the pegylated lipid ranges from about 100:1 to about 25:1. In some aspects, the pegylated lipid is PEG-DAG, a PEG polyethylene (PEG-PE), a PEG-succinoyl-diacylglycerol (PEG-S-DAG), PEG-cer or a PEG dialkyoxypropylcarbamate. In some aspects, the pegylated lipid has the following structure III:
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, tautomer or stereoisomer thereof, wherein: R10 and R11 are each independently a straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkyl chain containing from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, wherein the alkyl chain is optionally interrupted by one or more ester bonds; and z has a mean value ranging from 30 to 60. In some aspects, R10 and R11 are each independently straight, saturated alkyl chains having 12 to 16 carbon atoms. In some aspects, the average z is about 45.
start here
In some aspects, the LNP self-assembles into non-bilayer structures when mixed with polyanionic nucleic acid. In some aspects, the non-bilayer structures have a diameter between 60 nm and 120 nm. In some aspects, the non-bilayer structures have a diameter of about 70 nm, about 80 nm, about 90 nm, or about 100 nm. In some aspects, wherein the nanoparticulate delivery vehicle has a diameter of about 100 nm.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette is integrated between the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence and the at least one poly(A) sequence. In some aspects, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence is operably linked to the neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence.
In some aspects, the one or more vectors comprise one or more +-stranded RNA vectors. In some aspects, the one or more +-stranded RNA vectors comprise a 5′ 7-methylguanosine (m7g) cap. In some aspects, the one or more +-stranded RNA vectors are produced by in vitro transcription. In some aspects, the one or more vectors are self-replicating within a mammalian cell.
In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises at least one nucleotide sequence of an Aura virus, a Fort Morgan virus, a Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus, a Ross River virus, a Semliki Forest virus, a Sindbis virus, or a Mayaro virus. In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises at least one nucleotide sequence of a Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus. In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises at least sequences for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification, a 26S promoter sequence, a poly(A) sequence, a nonstructural protein 1 (nsP1) gene, a nsP2 gene, a nsP3 gene, and a nsP4 gene encoded by the nucleotide sequence of the Aura virus, the Fort Morgan virus, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus, the Ross River virus, the Semliki Forest virus, the Sindbis virus, or the Mayaro virus. In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone comprises at least sequences for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification, a 26S promoter sequence, and a poly(A) sequence encoded by the nucleotide sequence of the Aura virus, the Fort Morgan virus, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus, the Ross River virus, the Semliki Forest virus, the Sindbis virus, or the Mayaro virus. In some aspects, sequences for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification are selected from the group consisting of: an alphavirus 5′ UTR, a 51-nt CSE, a 24-nt CSE, a 26S subgenomic promoter sequence, a 19-nt CSE, an alphavirus 3′ UTR, or combinations thereof.
In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone does not encode structural virion proteins capsid, E2 and E1. In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette is inserted in place of the structural virion proteins within the nucleotide sequence of the Aura virus, the Fort Morgan virus, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus, the Ross River virus, the Semliki Forest virus, the Sindbis virus, or the Mayaro virus.
In some aspects, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus (VEE) comprises the strain TC-83. In some aspects, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus comprises the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5. In some aspects, the Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus comprises the sequence of SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5 further comprising a deletion between base pair 7544 and 11175. In some aspects, the RNA alphavirus backbone is the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:6 or SEQ ID NO:7. In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette is inserted to replace the deletion between base pair 7544 and 11175 set forth in the sequence of SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5.
In some aspects, the insertion of the neoantigen cassette provides for transcription of a polycistronic RNA comprising the nsP1-4 genes and the at least one of antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences, wherein the nsP1-4 genes and the at least one of antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences are in separate open reading frames.
In some aspects, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence is the native 26S promoter nucleotide sequence encoded by the RNA alphavirus backbone. In some aspects, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence is an exogenous RNA promoter. In some aspects, the second promoter nucleotide sequence is a 26S promoter nucleotide sequence. In some aspects, the second promoter nucleotide sequence comprises multiple 26S promoter nucleotide sequences, wherein each 26S promoter nucleotide sequence provides for transcription of one or more of the separate open reading frames.
In some aspects, the one or more neoantigen expression vectors are each at least 300 nt in size. In some aspects, the one or more neoantigen expression vectors are each at least 1 kb in size. In some aspects, the one or more neoantigen expression vectors are each 2 kb in size. In some aspects, the one or more neoantigen expression vectors are each less than 5 kb in size.
In some aspects, at least one of the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encodes a polypeptide sequence or portion thereof that is presented by MHC class I on the tumor cell. In some aspects, each antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is linked directly to one another. In some aspects, at least one of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences is linked to a distinct antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence with a nucleic acid sequence encoding a linker. In some aspects, the linker links two MHC class I sequences or an MHC class I sequence to an MHC class II sequence. In some aspects, the linker is selected from the group consisting of: (1) consecutive glycine residues, at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 residues in length; (2) consecutive alanine residues, at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 residues in length; (3) two arginine residues (RR); (4) alanine, alanine, tyrosine (AAY); (5) a consensus sequence at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 amino acid residues in length that is processed efficiently by a mammalian proteasome; and (6) one or more native sequences flanking the antigen derived from the cognate protein of origin and that is at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or 2-20 amino acid residues in length. In some aspects, the linker links two MHC class II sequences or an MHC class II sequence to an MHC class I sequence. In some aspects, the linker comprises the sequence GPGPG (SEQ ID NO: 56).
In some aspects, at least one sequence of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences is linked, operably or directly, to a separate or contiguous sequence that enhances the expression, stability, cell trafficking, processing and presentation, and/or immunogenicity of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences. In some aspects, the separate or contiguous sequence comprises at least one of: a ubiquitin sequence, a ubiquitin sequence modified to increase proteasome targeting (e.g., the ubiquitin sequence contains a Gly to Ala substitution at position 76), an immunoglobulin signal sequence (e.g., IgK), a major histocompatibility class I sequence, lysosomal-associated membrane protein (LAMP)-1, human dendritic cell lysosomal-associated membrane protein, and a major histocompatibility class II sequence; optionally wherein the ubiquitin sequence modified to increase proteasome targeting is A76.
In some aspects, at least one of the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encodes a polypeptide sequence or portion thereof that has increased binding affinity to its corresponding MHC allele relative to the translated, corresponding wild-type, nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, at least one of the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences in the plurality encodes a polypeptide sequence or portion thereof that has increased binding stability to its corresponding MHC allele relative to the translated, corresponding wild-type, nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, at least one of the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences in the plurality encodes a polypeptide sequence or portion thereof that has an increased likelihood of presentation on its corresponding MHC allele relative to the translated, corresponding wild-type, nucleic acid sequence.
In some aspects, at least one mutation comprises a point mutation, a frameshift mutation, a non-frameshift mutation, a deletion mutation, an insertion mutation, a splice variant, a genomic rearrangement, or a proteasome-generated spliced antigen.
In some aspects, the tumor is selected from the group consisting of: lung cancer, melanoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, kidney cancer, gastric cancer, colon cancer, testicular cancer, head and neck cancer, pancreatic cancer, bladder cancer, brain cancer, B-cell lymphoma, acute myelogenous leukemia, adult acute lymphoblastic leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, T cell lymphocytic leukemia, non-small cell lung cancer, and small cell lung cancer.
In some aspects, the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence comprises at least 2-10, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 nucleic acid sequences. In some aspects, the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence comprises at least 11-20, 15-20, 11-100, 11-200, 11-300, 11-400, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or up to 400 nucleic acid sequences.
In some aspects, the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence comprises at least 2-400 nucleic acid sequences and wherein at least two of the neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encode polypeptide sequences or portions thereof that are presented by MHC class I on the tumor cell surface. In some aspects, at least two of the neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences encode polypeptide sequences or portions thereof that are presented by MHC class I on the tumor cell surface. In some aspects, when administered to the subject and translated, at least one of the neoantigens encoded by the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence are presented on antigen presenting cells resulting in an immune response targeting at least one of the neoantigens on the tumor cell surface. In some aspects, the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences when administered to the subject and translated, at least one of the MHC class I or class II neoantigens are presented on antigen presenting cells resulting in an immune response targeting at least one of the neoantigens on the tumor cell surface, and optionally wherein the expression of each of the at least one neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences is driven by the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence.
In some aspects, each MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence encodes a polypeptide sequence between 8 and 35 amino acids in length, optionally 9-17, 9-25, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34 or 35 amino acids in length.
In some aspects, at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is present. In some aspects, at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is present and comprises at least one MHC class II neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence that comprises at least one mutation that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type, parental nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, the at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is 12-20, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or 20-40 amino acids in length. In some aspects, the at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is present and comprises at least one universal MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence, optionally wherein the at least one universal sequence comprises at least one of Tetanus toxoid and PADRE.
In some aspects, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence or the second promoter nucleotide sequence is inducible. In some aspects, the at least one promoter nucleotide sequence or the second promoter nucleotide sequence is non-inducible.
In some aspects, the at least one poly(A) sequence comprises a poly(A) sequence native to the alphavirus. In some aspects, the at least one poly(A) sequence comprises a poly(A) sequence exogenous to the alphavirus. In some aspects, the at least one poly(A) sequence is operably linked to at least one of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences. In some aspects, the at least one poly(A) sequence is at least 20, at least 30, at least 40, at least 50, at least 60, at least 70, at least 80, or at least 90 consecutive A nucleotides. In some aspects, the at least one poly(A) sequence is at least 100 consecutive A nucleotides.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette further comprises at least one of: an intron sequence, a woodchuck hepatitis virus posttranscriptional regulatory element (WPRE) sequence, an internal ribosome entry sequence (IRES) sequence, a nucleotide sequence encoding a 2A self cleaving peptide sequence, a nucleotide sequence encoding a Furin cleavage site, or a sequence in the 5′ or 3′ non-coding region known to enhance the nuclear export, stability, or translation efficiency of mRNA that is operably linked to at least one of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette further comprises a reporter gene, including but not limited to, green fluorescent protein (GFP), a GFP variant, secreted alkaline phosphatase, luciferase, a luciferase variant, or a detectable peptide or epitope. In some aspects, the detectable peptide or epitope is selected from the group consisting of an HA tag, a Flag tag, a His-tag, or a V5 tag.
In some aspects, the one or more vectors further comprise one or more nucleic acid sequences encoding at least one immune modulator. In some aspects, the immune modulator is an anti-CTLA4 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-L1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-4-1BB antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, or an anti-OX-40 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof. In some aspects, the antibody or antigen-binding fragment thereof is a Fab fragment, a Fab′ fragment, a single chain Fv (scFv), a single domain antibody (sdAb) either as single specific or multiple specificities linked together (e.g., camelid antibody domains), or full-length single-chain antibody (e.g., full-length IgG with heavy and light chains linked by a flexible linker). In some aspects, the heavy and light chain sequences of the antibody are a contiguous sequence separated by either a self-cleaving sequence such as 2A or IRES; or the heavy and light chain sequences of the antibody are linked by a flexible linker such as consecutive glycine residues.
In some aspects, the immune modulator is a cytokine. In some aspects, the cytokine is at least one of IL-2, IL-7, IL-12, IL-15, or IL-21 or variants thereof of each.
Also, disclosed herein is an adenovirus vector comprising a neoantigen cassette, the neoantigen cassette comprising: a plurality of antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences derived from a tumor present within a subject, the plurality comprising: at least two MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences each comprising at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type, parental nucleic acid sequence, and optionally, at least one MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence; and at least one promoter sequence operably linked to at least one sequence of the plurality.
In some aspects, the adenovirus vector is a chimpanzee adenovirus (ChAd) vector, optionally a C68 vector. In some aspects, the adenovirus vector comprises the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1. In some aspects, the adenovirus vector comprises the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1, except that the sequence is fully deleted or functionally deleted in at least one gene selected from the group consisting of the chimpanzee adenovirus E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5 genes of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1, optionally wherein the sequence is fully deleted or functionally deleted in: (1) E1A and E1B; (2) E1A, E1B, and E3; or (3) E1A, E1B, E3, and E4 of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1. In some aspects, the adenovirus vector comprises a gene or regulatory sequence obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, optionally wherein the gene is selected from the group consisting of the chimpanzee adenovirus inverted terminal repeat (ITR), E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5 genes of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette is inserted in the adenovirus vector at the E1 region, E3 region, and/or any deleted AdV region that allows incorporation of the neoantigen cassette.
In some aspects, the at least one promoter sequence of the adenovirus vector is inducible. In some aspects, the at least one promoter sequence of the adenovirus vector is non-inducible. In some aspects, the at least one promoter sequence of the adenovirus vector is a CMV, SV40, EF-1, RSV, PGK, or EBV promoter sequence.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette of the adenovirus vector further comprises at least one polyA sequence operably linked to at least one of the sequences in the plurality, optionally wherein the polyA sequence is located 3′ of the at least one sequence in the plurality.
In some aspects, the adenovirus vector is generated from one of a first generation, a second generation, or a helper-dependent adenoviral vector.
In some aspects, the adenovirus vector comprises one or more deletions between base pair number 577 and 3407 and optionally wherein the adenovirus vector further comprises one or more deletions between base pair 27,141 and 32,022 or between base pair 27,816 and 31,332 of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1. In some aspects, the adenovirus vector further comprises one or more deletions between base pair number 3957 and 10346, base pair number 21787 and 23370, and base pair number 33486 and 36193 of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:1.
In some aspects, the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is selected by performing the steps of: (a) obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome, or whole genome tumor nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor, wherein the tumor nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens; (b) inputting the peptide sequence of each neoantigen into a presentation model to generate a set of numerical likelihoods that each of the neoantigens is presented by one or more of the MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface of the tumor, the set of numerical likelihoods having been identified at least based on received mass spectrometry data; and (c) selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of numerical likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens which are used to generate the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence.
In some aspects, each of the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence is selected by performing the steps of: (a) obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome, or whole genome tumor nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor, wherein the tumor nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens; (b) inputting the peptide sequence of each neoantigen into a presentation model to generate a set of numerical likelihoods that each of the neoantigens is presented by one or more of the MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface of the tumor, the set of numerical likelihoods having been identified at least based on received mass spectrometry data; and (c) selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of numerical likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens which are used to generate the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence.
In some aspects, a number of the set of selected neoantigens is 2-20.
In some aspects, the presentation model represents dependence between: presence of a pair of a particular one of the MHC alleles and a particular amino acid at a particular position of a peptide sequence; and likelihood of presentation on the tumor cell surface, by the particular one of the MHC alleles of the pair, of such a peptide sequence comprising the particular amino acid at the particular position.
In some aspects, selecting the set of selected neoantigens comprises selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being presented on the tumor cell surface relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model. In some aspects, selecting the set of selected neoantigens comprises selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being capable of inducing a tumor-specific immune response in the subject relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model. In some aspects, selecting the set of selected neoantigens comprises selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being capable of being presented to naïve T cells by professional antigen presenting cells (APCs) relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model, optionally wherein the APC is a dendritic cell (DC). In some aspects, selecting the set of selected neoantigens comprises selecting neoantigens that have a decreased likelihood of being subject to inhibition via central or peripheral tolerance relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model. In some aspects, selecting the set of selected neoantigens comprises selecting neoantigens that have a decreased likelihood of being capable of inducing an autoimmune response to normal tissue in the subject relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model. In some aspects, exome or transcriptome nucleotide sequencing data is obtained by performing sequencing on the tumor tissue. In some aspects, the sequencing is next generation sequencing (NGS) or any massively parallel sequencing approach.
In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette comprises junctional epitope sequences formed by adjacent sequences in the neoantigen cassette. In some aspects, at least one or each junctional epitope sequence has an affinity of greater than 500 nM for MHC. In some aspects, each junctional epitope sequence is non-self. In some aspects, the neoantigen cassette does not encode a non-therapeutic MHC class I or class II epitope nucleic acid sequence comprising a translated, wild-type nucleic acid sequence, wherein the non-therapeutic epitope is predicted to be displayed on an MHC allele of the subject. In some aspects, the non-therapeutic predicted MHC class I or class II epitope sequence is a junctional epitope sequence formed by adjacent sequences in the neoantigen cassette. In some aspects, the prediction is based on presentation likelihoods generated by inputting sequences of the non-therapeutic epitopes into a presentation model. In some aspects, an order of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences in the neoantigen cassette is determined by a series of steps comprising: (a) generating a set of candidate neoantigen cassette sequences corresponding to different orders of the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences; (b) determining, for each candidate neoantigen cassette sequence, a presentation score based on presentation of non-therapeutic epitopes in the candidate neoantigen cassette sequence; and (c) selecting a candidate cassette sequence associated with a presentation score below a predetermined threshold as the neoantigen cassette sequence for a neoantigen vaccine.
Also disclosed herein is a pharmaceutical composition comprising any of the compositions disclosed herein (such as an alphavirus-based or ChAd-based vector disclosed herein) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In some aspects, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises an adjuvant. In some aspects, the pharmaceutical composition further comprises an immune modulator. In some aspects, the immune modulator is an anti-CTLA4 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-L1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-4-1BB antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, or an anti-OX-40 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof.
Also disclosed herein is an isolated nucleotide sequence or set of isolated nucleotide sequences comprising the neoantigen cassette of any of the above composition claims and one or more elements obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5, optionally wherein the one or more elements are selected from the group consisting of the sequences necessary for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification, the 26S promoter nucleotide sequence, the poly(A) sequence, and the nsP1-4 genes of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5, and optionally wherein the nucleotide sequence is cDNA. In some aspects, the sequence or set of isolated nucleotide sequences comprises a neoantigen cassette disclosed herein inserted at position 7544 of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO:6 or SEQ ID NO:7. In some aspects, the isolated nucleotide sequence further comprises a T7 or SP6 RNA polymerase promoter nucleotide sequence 5′ of the one or more elements obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO:3 or SEQ ID NO:5, and optionally one or more restriction sites 3′ of the poly(A) sequence. In some aspects, the the neoantigen cassette disclosed herein is inserted at position 7563 of SEQ ID NO:8 or SEQ ID NO:9. In another aspect, the sequences set forth in SEQ ID NO:8 or SEQ ID NO:9 further comprise an additional adenine nucleotide inserted at position 17.
Also disclosed herein is an isolated nucleotide sequence comprising a neoantigen cassette disclosed herein and at least one promoter disclosed herein. In some aspects, the isolated nucleotide sequence further comprises a ChAd-based gene. In some aspects, the ChAd-based gene is obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, optionally wherein the gene is selected from the group consisting of the chimpanzee adenovirus ITR, E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4, and L5 genes of the sequence set forth in SEQ ID NO: 1, and optionally wherein the nucleotide sequence is cDNA.
Also disclosed herein is an isolated cell comprising an isolated nucleotide sequence disclosed herein, optionally wherein the cell is a BHK-21, CHO, HEK293 or variants thereof, 911, HeLa, A549, LP-293, PER.C6, or AE1-2a cell.
Also disclosed herein is a vector comprising an isolated nucleotide sequence disclosed herein.
Also disclosed herein is a kit comprising a vector or a composition disclosed herein and instructions for use.
Also disclosed herein is a method for treating a subject with cancer, the method comprising administering to the subject a vector disclosed herein or a pharmaceutical composition disclosed herein. In some aspects, the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence derived from a tumor are derived from the tumor of the subject with cancer. In some aspects, the at least one MHC class I neoantigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence are not derived from the tumor of the subject with cancer.
Also disclosed herein is a method for inducing an immune response in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject any of the compositions, vectors, or pharmaceutical compositions described herein.
In some aspects, the vector or composition is administered intramuscularly (IM), intradermally (ID), or subcutaneously (SC), or intravenously (IV).
In some aspects, the methods described herein further comprise administration of one or more immune modulators, optionally wherein the immune modulator is administered before, concurrently with, or after administration of the composition or pharmaceutical composition. In some aspects, the one or more immune modulators are selected from the group consisting of: an anti-CTLA4 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-PD-L1 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, an anti-4-1BB antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof, or an anti-OX-40 antibody or an antigen-binding fragment thereof. In some aspects, the immune modulator is administered intravenously (IV), intramuscularly (IM), intradermally (ID), or subcutaneously (SC). In some aspects, the subcutaneous administration is near the site of the composition or pharmaceutical composition administration or in close proximity to one or more vector or composition draining lymph nodes.
In some aspects, the methods described herein further comprise administering to the subject a second vaccine composition. In some aspects, the second vaccine composition is administered prior to the administration of the composition or the pharmaceutical composition described above. In some aspects, the second vaccine composition is administered subsequent to the administration of the composition or the pharmaceutical compositions described above. In some aspects, the second vaccine composition is the same as the composition or the pharmaceutical compositions described above. In some aspects, the second vaccine composition is different from the composition or the pharmaceutical compositions described above. In some aspects, the second vaccine composition comprises a chimpanzee adenovirus vector encoding at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence. In some aspects, the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence encoded by the chimpanzee adenovirus vector is the same as the at least one antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence of any of the above compositions or vectors.
Also disclosed herein is a method of manufacturing the one or more vectors of any of the above compositions, the method comprising: obtaining a linearized DNA sequence comprising the RNA alphavirus backbone and the neoantigen cassette; in vitro transcribing the linearized DNA sequence by addition of the linearized DNA sequence to a in vitro transcription reaction containing all the necessary components to trancribe the linearized DNA sequence into RNA, optionally further comprising in vitro addition of the m7g cap to the resulting RNA; and isolating the one or more vectors from the in vitro transcription reaction. In some aspects, the linearized DNA sequence is generated by linearizing a DNA plasmid sequence or by amplification using PCR. In some aspects, the DNA plasmid sequence is generated using one of bacterial recombination or full genome DNA synthesis or full genome DNA synthesis with amplification of synthesized DNA in bacterial cells. In some aspects, the isolating the one or more vectors from the in vitro transcription reaction involves one or more of phenol chloroform extraction, silica column based purification, or similar RNA purification methods.
Also disclosed herein is a method of manufacturing any of the compositions disclosed herein, the method comprising: providing components for the nanoparticulate delivery vehicle; providing the neoantigen expression system; and providing conditions sufficient for the nanoparticulate delivery vehicle and the neoantigen expression system to produce the composition for delivery of the neoantigen expression system. In some aspects, the conditions are provided by microfluidic mixing.
Also disclosed herein is a method of manufacturing a adenovirus vector disclosed herein, the method comprising: obtaining a plasmid sequence comprising the at least one promoter sequence and the neoantigen cassette; transfecting the plasmid sequence into one or more host cells; and isolating the adenovirus vector from the one or more host cells.
In some aspects, isolating comprises: lysing the host cell to obtain a cell lysate comprising the adenovirus vector, and purifying the adenovirus vector from the cell lysate.
In some aspects, the plasmid sequence is generated using one of bacterial recombination or full genome DNA synthesis or full genome DNA synthesis with amplification of synthesized DNA in bacterial cells. In some aspects, the one or more host cells are at least one of CHO, HEK293 or variants thereof, 911, HeLa, A549, LP-293, PER.C6, and AE1-2a cells. In some aspects, purifying the adenovirus vector from the cell lysate involves one or more of chromatographic separation, centrifugation, virus precipitation, and filtration.
These and other features, aspects, and advantages of the present invention will become better understood with regard to the following description, and accompanying drawings, where:
In general, terms used in the claims and the specification are intended to be construed as having the plain meaning understood by a person of ordinary skill in the art. Certain terms are defined below to provide additional clarity. In case of conflict between the plain meaning and the provided definitions, the provided definitions are to be used.
As used herein the term “antigen” is a substance that induces an immune response.
As used herein the term “neoantigen” is an antigen that has at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type antigen, e.g., via mutation in a tumor cell or post-translational modification specific to a tumor cell. A neoantigen can include a polypeptide sequence or a nucleotide sequence. A mutation can include a frameshift or nonframeshift indel, missense or nonsense substitution, splice site alteration, genomic rearrangement or gene fusion, or any genomic or expression alteration giving rise to a neoORF. A mutations can also include a splice variant. Post-translational modifications specific to a tumor cell can include aberrant phosphorylation. Post-translational modifications specific to a tumor cell can also include a proteasome-generated spliced antigen. See Liepe et al., A large fraction of HLA class I ligands are proteasome-generated spliced peptides; Science. 2016 Oct. 21; 354(6310):354-358.
As used herein the term “tumor neoantigen” is a neoantigen present in a subject's tumor cell or tissue but not in the subject's corresponding normal cell or tissue.
As used herein the term “neoantigen-based vaccine” is a vaccine construct based on one or more neoantigens, e.g., a plurality of neoantigens.
As used herein the term “candidate neoantigen” is a mutation or other aberration giving rise to a new sequence that may represent a neoantigen.
As used herein the term “coding region” is the portion(s) of a gene that encode protein.
As used herein the term “coding mutation” is a mutation occurring in a coding region.
As used herein the term “ORF” means open reading frame.
As used herein the term “NEO-ORF” is a tumor-specific ORF arising from a mutation or other aberration such as splicing.
As used herein the term “missense mutation” is a mutation causing a substitution from one amino acid to another.
As used herein the term “nonsense mutation” is a mutation causing a substitution from an amino acid to a stop codon or causing removal of a canonical start codon.
As used herein the term “frameshift mutation” is a mutation causing a change in the frame of the protein.
As used herein the term “indel” is an insertion or deletion of one or more nucleic acids.
As used herein, the term percent “identity,” in the context of two or more nucleic acid or polypeptide sequences, refer to two or more sequences or subsequences that have a specified percentage of nucleotides or amino acid residues that are the same, when compared and aligned for maximum correspondence, as measured using one of the sequence comparison algorithms described below (e.g., BLASTP and BLASTN or other algorithms available to persons of skill) or by visual inspection. Depending on the application, the percent “identity” can exist over a region of the sequence being compared, e.g., over a functional domain, or, alternatively, exist over the full length of the two sequences to be compared.
For sequence comparison, typically one sequence acts as a reference sequence to which test sequences are compared. When using a sequence comparison algorithm, test and reference sequences are input into a computer, subsequence coordinates are designated, if necessary, and sequence algorithm program parameters are designated. The sequence comparison algorithm then calculates the percent sequence identity for the test sequence(s) relative to the reference sequence, based on the designated program parameters. Alternatively, sequence similarity or dissimilarity can be established by the combined presence or absence of particular nucleotides, or, for translated sequences, amino acids at selected sequence positions (e.g., sequence motifs).
Optimal alignment of sequences for comparison can be conducted, e.g., by the local homology algorithm of Smith & Waterman, Adv. Appl. Math. 2:482 (1981), by the homology alignment algorithm of Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol. 48:443 (1970), by the search for similarity method of Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l. Acad. Sci. USA 85:2444 (1988), by computerized implementations of these algorithms (GAP, BESTFIT, FASTA, and TFASTA in the Wisconsin Genetics Software Package, Genetics Computer Group, 575 Science Dr., Madison, Wis.), or by visual inspection (see generally Ausubel et al., infra).
One example of an algorithm that is suitable for determining percent sequence identity and sequence similarity is the BLAST algorithm, which is described in Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol. 215:403-410 (1990). Software for performing BLAST analyses is publicly available through the National Center for Biotechnology Information.
As used herein the term “non-stop or read-through” is a mutation causing the removal of the natural stop codon.
As used herein the term “epitope” is the specific portion of an antigen typically bound by an antibody or T cell receptor.
As used herein the term “immunogenic” is the ability to elicit an immune response, e.g., via T cells, B cells, or both.
As used herein the term “HLA binding affinity” “MHC binding affinity” means affinity of binding between a specific antigen and a specific MHC allele.
As used herein the term “bait” is a nucleic acid probe used to enrich a specific sequence of DNA or RNA from a sample.
As used herein the term “variant” is a difference between a subject's nucleic acids and the reference human genome used as a control.
As used herein the term “variant call” is an algorithmic determination of the presence of a variant, typically from sequencing.
As used herein the term “polymorphism” is a germline variant, i.e., a variant found in all DNA-bearing cells of an individual.
As used herein the term “somatic variant” is a variant arising in non-germline cells of an individual.
As used herein the term “allele” is a version of a gene or a version of a genetic sequence or a version of a protein.
As used herein the term “HLA type” is the complement of HLA gene alleles.
As used herein the term “nonsense-mediated decay” or “NMD” is a degradation of an mRNA by a cell due to a premature stop codon.
As used herein the term “truncal mutation” is a mutation originating early in the development of a tumor and present in a substantial portion of the tumor's cells.
As used herein the term “subclonal mutation” is a mutation originating later in the development of a tumor and present in only a subset of the tumor's cells.
As used herein the term “exome” is a subset of the genome that codes for proteins. An exome can be the collective exons of a genome.
As used herein the term “logistic regression” is a regression model for binary data from statistics where the logit of the probability that the dependent variable is equal to one is modeled as a linear function of the dependent variables.
As used herein the term “neural network” is a machine learning model for classification or regression consisting of multiple layers of linear transformations followed by element-wise nonlinearities typically trained via stochastic gradient descent and back-propagation.
As used herein the term “proteome” is the set of all proteins expressed and/or translated by a cell, group of cells, or individual.
As used herein the term “peptidome” is the set of all peptides presented by MHC-I or MHC-II on the cell surface. The peptidome may refer to a property of a cell or a collection of cells (e.g., the tumor peptidome, meaning the union of the peptidomes of all cells that comprise the tumor).
As used herein the term “ELISPOT” means Enzyme-linked immunosorbent spot assay—which is a common method for monitoring immune responses in humans and animals.
As used herein the term “dextramers” is a dextran-based peptide-MHC multimers used for antigen-specific T-cell staining in flow cytometry.
As used herein the term “tolerance or immune tolerance” is a state of immune non-responsiveness to one or more antigens, e.g. self-antigens.
As used herein the term “central tolerance” is a tolerance affected in the thymus, either by deleting self-reactive T-cell clones or by promoting self-reactive T-cell clones to differentiate into immunosuppressive regulatory T-cells (Tregs).
As used herein the term “peripheral tolerance” is a tolerance affected in the periphery by downregulating or anergizing self-reactive T-cells that survive central tolerance or promoting these T cells to differentiate into Tregs.
The term “sample” can include a single cell or multiple cells or fragments of cells or an aliquot of body fluid, taken from a subject, by means including venipuncture, excretion, ejaculation, massage, biopsy, needle aspirate, lavage sample, scraping, surgical incision, or intervention or other means known in the art.
The term “subject” encompasses a cell, tissue, or organism, human or non-human, whether in vivo, ex vivo, or in vitro, male or female. The term subject is inclusive of mammals including humans.
The term “mammal” encompasses both humans and non-humans and includes but is not limited to humans, non-human primates, canines, felines, murines, bovines, equines, and porcines.
The term “clinical factor” refers to a measure of a condition of a subject, e.g., disease activity or severity. “Clinical factor” encompasses all markers of a subject's health status, including non-sample markers, and/or other characteristics of a subject, such as, without limitation, age and gender. A clinical factor can be a score, a value, or a set of values that can be obtained from evaluation of a sample (or population of samples) from a subject or a subject under a determined condition. A clinical factor can also be predicted by markers and/or other parameters such as gene expression surrogates. Clinical factors can include tumor type, tumor sub-type, and smoking history.
The term “antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences derived from a tumor” refers to nucleic acid sequences directly extracted from the tumor, e.g. via RT-PCR; or sequence data obtained by sequencing the tumor and then synthesizing the nucleic acid sequences using the sequencing data, e.g., via various synthetic or PCR-based methods known in the art.
The term “alphavirus” refers to members of the family Togaviridae, and are positive-sense single-stranded RNA viruses. Alphaviruses are typically classified as either Old World, such as Sindbis, Ross River, Mayaro, Chikungunya, and Semliki Forest viruses, or New World, such as eastern equine encephalitis, Aura, Fort Morgan, or Venezuelan equine encephalitis and its derivative strain TC-83. Alphaviruses are typically self-replicating RNA viruses.
The term “alphavirus backbone” refers to minimal sequence(s) of an alphavirus that allow for self-replication of the viral genome. Minimal sequences can include conserved sequences for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification, a nonstructural protein 1 (nsP1) gene, a nsP2 gene, a nsP3 gene, a nsP4 gene, and a polyA sequence, as well as sequences for expression of subgenomic viral RNA including a 26S promoter element.
The term “sequences for nonstructural protein-mediated amplification” includes alphavirus conserved sequence elements (CSE) well known to those in the art. CSEs include, but are not limited to, an alphavirus 5′ UTR, a 51-nt CSE, a 24-nt CSE, or other 26S subgenomic promoter sequence, a 19-nt CSE, and an alphavirus 3′ UTR.
The term “RNA polymerase” includes polymerases that catalyze the production of RNA polynucleotides from a DNA template. RNA polymerases include, but are not limited to, bacteriophage derived polymerases including T3, T7, and SP6.
The term “lipid” includes hydrophobic and/or amphiphilic molecules. Lipids can be cationic, anionic, or neutral. Lipids can be synthetic or naturally derived, and in some instances biodegradable. Lipids can include cholesterol, phospholipids, lipid conjugates including, but not limited to, polyethyleneglycol (PEG) conjugates (PEGylated lipids), waxes, oils, glycerides, fats, and fat-soluble vitamins. Lipids can also include dilinoleylmethyl-4-dimethylaminobutyrate (MC3) and MC3-like molecules.
The term “lipid nanoparticle” or “LNP” includes vesicle like structures formed using a lipid containing membrane surrounding an aqueous interior, also referred to as liposomes. Lipid nanoparticles includes lipid-based compositions with a solid lipid core stabilized by a surfactant. The core lipids can be fatty acids, acylglycerols, waxes, and mixtures of these surfactants. Biological membrane lipids such as phospholipids, sphingomyelins, bile salts (sodium taurocholate), and sterols (cholesterol) can be utilized as stabilizers. Lipid nanoparticles can be formed using defined ratios of different lipid molecules, including, but not limited to, defined ratios of one or more cationic, anionic, or neutral lipids. Lipid nanoparticles can encapsulate molecules within an outer-membrane shell and subsequently can be contacted with target cells to deliver the encapsulated molecules to the host cell cytosol. Lipid nanoparticles can be modified or functionalized with non-lipid molecules, including on their surface. Lipid nanoparticles can be single-layered (unilamellar) or multi-layered (multilamellar). Lipid nanoparticles can be complexed with nucleic acid. Unilamellar lipid nanoparticles can be complexed with nucleic acid, wherein the nucleic acid is in the aqueous interior. Multilamellar lipid nanoparticles can be complexed with nucleic acid, wherein the nucleic acid is in the aqueous interior, or to form or sandwiched between
Abbreviations: MHC: major histocompatibility complex; HLA: human leukocyte antigen, or the human MHC gene locus; NGS: next-generation sequencing; PPV: positive predictive value; TSNA: tumor-specific neoantigen; FFPE: formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded; NMD: nonsense-mediated decay; NSCLC: non-small-cell lung cancer; DC: dendritic cell.
It should be noted that, as used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
Unless specifically stated or otherwise apparent from context, as used herein the term “about” is understood as within a range of normal tolerance in the art, for example within 2 standard deviations of the mean. About can be understood as within 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, or 0.01% of the stated value. Unless otherwise clear from context, all numerical values provided herein are modified by the term about.
Any terms not directly defined herein shall be understood to have the meanings commonly associated with them as understood within the art of the invention. Certain terms are discussed herein to provide additional guidance to the practitioner in describing the compositions, devices, methods and the like of aspects of the invention, and how to make or use them. It will be appreciated that the same thing may be said in more than one way. Consequently, alternative language and synonyms may be used for any one or more of the terms discussed herein. No significance is to be placed upon whether or not a term is elaborated or discussed herein. Some synonyms or substitutable methods, materials and the like are provided. Recital of one or a few synonyms or equivalents does not exclude use of other synonyms or equivalents, unless it is explicitly stated. Use of examples, including examples of terms, is for illustrative purposes only and does not limit the scope and meaning of the aspects of the invention herein.
All references, issued patents and patent applications cited within the body of the specification are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety, for all purposes.
Disclosed herein are methods for identifying neoantigens from a tumor of a subject that are likely to be presented on the cell surface of the tumor or immune cells, including professional antigen presenting cells such as dendritic cells, and/or are likely to be immunogenic. As an example, one such method may comprise the steps of: obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome or whole genome tumor nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor cell of the subject, wherein the tumor nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens, and wherein the peptide sequence of each neoantigen comprises at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type peptide sequence; inputting the peptide sequence of each neoantigen into one or more presentation models to generate a set of numerical likelihoods that each of the neoantigens is presented by one or more MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface of the tumor cell of the subject or cells present in the tumor, the set of numerical likelihoods having been identified at least based on received mass spectrometry data; and selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of numerical likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens.
The presentation model can comprise a statistical regression or a machine learning (e.g., deep learning) model trained on a set of reference data (also referred to as a training data set) comprising a set of corresponding labels, wherein the set of reference data is obtained from each of a plurality of distinct subjects where optionally some subjects can have a tumor, and wherein the set of reference data comprises at least one of: data representing exome nucleotide sequences from tumor tissue, data representing exome nucleotide sequences from normal tissue, data representing transcriptome nucleotide sequences from tumor tissue, data representing proteome sequences from tumor tissue, and data representing MHC peptidome sequences from tumor tissue, and data representing MHC peptidome sequences from normal tissue. The reference data can further comprise mass spectrometry data, sequencing data, RNA sequencing data, and proteomics data for single-allele cell lines engineered to express a predetermined MHC allele that are subsequently exposed to synthetic protein, normal and tumor human cell lines, and fresh and frozen primary samples, and T cell assays (e.g., ELISPOT). In certain aspects, the set of reference data includes each form of reference data.
The presentation model can comprise a set of features derived at least in part from the set of reference data, and wherein the set of features comprises at least one of allele dependent-features and allele-independent features. In certain aspects each feature is included.
Also disclosed herein are methods for generating an output for constructing a personalized cancer vaccine by identifying one or more neoantigens from one or more tumor cells of a subject that are likely to be presented on a surface of the tumor cells. As an example, one such method may comprise the steps of: obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome, or whole genome nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor cells and normal cells of the subject, wherein the nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens identified by comparing the nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor cells and the nucleotide sequencing data from the normal cells, and wherein the peptide sequence of each neoantigen comprises at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type, peptide sequence identified from the normal cells of the subject; encoding the peptide sequences of each of the neoantigens into a corresponding numerical vector, each numerical vector including information regarding a plurality of amino acids that make up the peptide sequence and a set of positions of the amino acids in the peptide sequence; inputting the numerical vectors, using a computer processor, into a deep learning presentation model to generate a set of presentation likelihoods for the set of neoantigens, each presentation likelihood in the set representing the likelihood that a corresponding neoantigen is presented by one or more class II MHC alleles on the surface of the tumor cells of the subject, the deep learning presentation model; selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of presentation likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens; and generating the output for constructing the personalized cancer vaccine based on the set of selected neoantigens.
In some embodiments, the presentation model comprises a plurality of parameters identified at least based on a training data set and a function representing a relation between the numerical vector received as an input and the presentation likelihood generated as output based on the numerical vector and the parameters. In certain embodiments, the training data set comprises labels obtained by mass spectrometry measuring presence of peptides bound to at least one class II MHC allele identified as present in at least one of a plurality of samples, training peptide sequences encoded as numerical vectors including information regarding a plurality of amino acids that make up the peptide sequence and a set of positions of the amino acids in the peptide sequence, and at least one HLA allele associated with the training peptide sequences.
Dendritic cell presentation to naïve T cell features can comprise at least one of: A feature described above. The dose and type of antigen in the vaccine. (e.g., peptide, mRNA, virus, etc.): (1) The route by which dendritic cells (DCs) take up the antigen type (e.g., endocytosis, micropinocytosis); and/or (2) The efficacy with which the antigen is taken up by DCs. The dose and type of adjuvant in the vaccine. The length of the vaccine antigen sequence. The number and sites of vaccine administration. Baseline patient immune functioning (e.g., as measured by history of recent infections, blood counts, etc). For RNA vaccines: (1) the turnover rate of the mRNA protein product in the dendritic cell; (2) the rate of translation of the mRNA after uptake by dendritic cells as measured in in vitro or in vivo experiments; and/or (3) the number or rounds of translation of the mRNA after uptake by dendritic cells as measured by in vivo or in vitro experiments. The presence of protease cleavage motifs in the peptide, optionally giving additional weight to proteases typically expressed in dendritic cells (as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry). The level of expression of the proteasome and immunoproteasome in typical activated dendritic cells (which may be measured by RNA-seq, mass spectrometry, immunohistochemistry, or other standard techniques). The expression levels of the particular MHC allele in the individual in question (e.g., as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry), optionally measured specifically in activated dendritic cells or other immune cells. The probability of peptide presentation by the particular MHC allele in other individuals who express the particular MHC allele, optionally measured specifically in activated dendritic cells or other immune cells. The probability of peptide presentation by MHC alleles in the same family of molecules (e.g., HLA-A, HLA-B, HLA-C, HLA-DQ, HLA-DR, HLA-DP) in other individuals, optionally measured specifically in activated dendritic cells or other immune cells.
Immune tolerance escape features can comprise at least one of: Direct measurement of the self-peptidome via protein mass spectrometry performed on one or several cell types. Estimation of the self-peptidome by taking the union of all k-mer (e.g. 5-25) substrings of self-proteins. Estimation of the self-peptidome using a model of presentation similar to the presentation model described above applied to all non-mutation self-proteins, optionally accounting for germline variants.
Ranking can be performed using the plurality of neoantigens provided by at least one model based at least in part on the numerical likelihoods. Following the ranking a selecting can be performed to select a subset of the ranked neoantigens according to a selection criteria. After selecting a subset of the ranked peptides can be provided as an output.
A number of the set of selected neoantigens may be 20.
The presentation model may represent dependence between presence of a pair of a particular one of the MHC alleles and a particular amino acid at a particular position of a peptide sequence; and likelihood of presentation on the tumor cell surface, by the particular one of the MHC alleles of the pair, of such a peptide sequence comprising the particular amino acid at the particular position.
A method disclosed herein can also include applying the one or more presentation models to the peptide sequence of the corresponding neoantigen to generate a dependency score for each of the one or more MHC alleles indicating whether the MHC allele will present the corresponding neoantigen based on at least positions of amino acids of the peptide sequence of the corresponding neoantigen.
A method disclosed herein can also include transforming the dependency scores to generate a corresponding per-allele likelihood for each MHC allele indicating a likelihood that the corresponding MHC allele will present the corresponding neoantigen; and combining the per-allele likelihoods to generate the numerical likelihood.
The step of transforming the dependency scores can model the presentation of the peptide sequence of the corresponding neoantigen as mutually exclusive.
A method disclosed herein can also include transforming a combination of the dependency scores to generate the numerical likelihood.
The step of transforming the combination of the dependency scores can model the presentation of the peptide sequence of the corresponding neoantigen as interfering between MHC alleles.
The set of numerical likelihoods can be further identified by at least an allele noninteracting feature, and a method disclosed herein can also include applying an allele noninteracting one of the one or more presentation models to the allele noninteracting features to generate a dependency score for the allele noninteracting features indicating whether the peptide sequence of the corresponding neoantigen will be presented based on the allele noninteracting features.
A method disclosed herein can also include combining the dependency score for each MHC allele in the one or more MHC alleles with the dependency score for the allele noninteracting feature; transforming the combined dependency scores for each MHC allele to generate a corresponding per-allele likelihood for the MHC allele indicating a likelihood that the corresponding MHC allele will present the corresponding neoantigen; and combining the per-allele likelihoods to generate the numerical likelihood.
A method disclosed herein can also include transforming a combination of the dependency scores for each of the MHC alleles and the dependency score for the allele noninteracting features to generate the numerical likelihood.
A set of numerical parameters for the presentation model can be trained based on a training data set including at least a set of training peptide sequences identified as present in a plurality of samples and one or more MHC alleles associated with each training peptide sequence, wherein the training peptide sequences are identified through mass spectrometry on isolated peptides eluted from MHC alleles derived from the plurality of samples.
The samples can also include cell lines engineered to express a single MHC class I or class II allele.
The samples can also include cell lines engineered to express a plurality of MHC class I or class II alleles.
The samples can also include human cell lines obtained or derived from a plurality of patients.
The samples can also include fresh or frozen tumor samples obtained from a plurality of patients.
The samples can also include fresh or frozen tissue samples obtained from a plurality of patients.
The samples can also include peptides identified using T-cell assays.
The training data set can further include data associated with: peptide abundance of the set of training peptides present in the samples; peptide length of the set of training peptides in the samples.
The training data set may be generated by comparing the set of training peptide sequences via alignment to a database comprising a set of known protein sequences, wherein the set of training protein sequences are longer than and include the training peptide sequences.
The training data set may be generated based on performing or having performed nucleotide sequencing on a cell line to obtain at least one of exome, transcriptome, or whole genome sequencing data from the cell line, the sequencing data including at least one nucleotide sequence including an alteration.
The training data set may be generated based on obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome, and whole genome normal nucleotide sequencing data from normal tissue samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with proteome sequences associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with MHC peptidome sequences associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with peptide-MHC binding affinity measurements for at least one of the isolated peptides.
The training data set may further include data associated with peptide-MHC binding stability measurements for at least one of the isolated peptides.
The training data set may further include data associated with transcriptomes associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with genomes associated with the samples.
The training peptide sequences may be of lengths within a range of k-mers where k is between 8-15, inclusive for MHC class I or 6-30 inclusive for MHC class II.
A method disclosed herein can also include encoding the peptide sequence using a one-hot encoding scheme.
A method disclosed herein can also include encoding the training peptide sequences using a left-padded one-hot encoding scheme.
A method of treating a subject having a tumor, comprising performing the steps of any of the neoantigen identification methods described herein, and further comprising obtaining a tumor vaccine comprising the set of selected neoantigens, and administering the tumor vaccine to the subject.
A method disclosed herein can also include identifying one or more T cells that are antigen-specific for at least one of the neoantigens in the subset. In some embodiments, the identification comprises co-culturing the one or more T cells with one or more of the neoantigens in the subset under conditions that expand the one or more antigen-specific T cells. In further embodiments, the identification comprises contacting the one or more T cells with a tetramer comprising one or more of the neoantigens in the subset under conditions that allow binding between the T cell and the tetramer. In even further embodiments, the method disclosed herein can also include identifying one or more T cell receptors (TCR) of the one or more identified T cells. In certain embodiments, identifying the one or more T cell receptors comprises sequencing the T cell receptor sequences of the one or more identified T cells. The method disclosed herein can further comprise genetically engineering a plurality of T cells to express at least one of the one or more identified T cell receptors; culturing the plurality of T cells under conditions that expand the plurality of T cells; and infusing the expanded T cells into the subject. In some embodiments, genetically engineering the plurality of T cells to express at least one of the one or more identified T cell receptors comprises cloning the T cell receptor sequences of the one or more identified T cells into an expression vector, and transfecting each of the plurality of T cells with the expression vector. In some embodiments, the method disclosed herein further comprises culturing the one or more identified T cells under conditions that expand the one or more identified T cells; and infusing the expanded T cells into the subject.
Also disclosed herein is an isolated T cell that is antigen-specific for at least one selected neoantigen in the subset.
Also disclosed herein is a methods for manufacturing a tumor vaccine, comprising the steps of: obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome or whole genome tumor nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor cell of the subject, wherein the tumor nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens, and wherein the peptide sequence of each neoantigen comprises at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type peptide sequence; inputting the peptide sequence of each neoantigen into one or more presentation models to generate a set of numerical likelihoods that each of the neoantigens is presented by one or more MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface of the tumor cell of the subject, the set of numerical likelihoods having been identified at least based on received mass spectrometry data; and selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of numerical likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens; and producing or having produced a tumor vaccine comprising the set of selected neoantigens.
Also disclosed herein is a tumor vaccine including a set of selected neoantigens selected by performing the method comprising the steps of: obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome or whole genome tumor nucleotide sequencing data from the tumor cell of the subject, wherein the tumor nucleotide sequencing data is used to obtain data representing peptide sequences of each of a set of neoantigens, and wherein the peptide sequence of each neoantigen comprises at least one alteration that makes it distinct from the corresponding wild-type peptide sequence; inputting the peptide sequence of each neoantigen into one or more presentation models to generate a set of numerical likelihoods that each of the neoantigens is presented by one or more MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface of the tumor cell of the subject, the set of numerical likelihoods having been identified at least based on received mass spectrometry data; and selecting a subset of the set of neoantigens based on the set of numerical likelihoods to generate a set of selected neoantigens; and producing or having produced a tumor vaccine comprising the set of selected neoantigens.
The tumor vaccine may include one or more of a nucleotide sequence, a polypeptide sequence, RNA, DNA, a cell, a plasmid, or a vector.
The tumor vaccine may include one or more neoantigens presented on the tumor cell surface.
The tumor vaccine may include one or more neoantigens that is immunogenic in the subject.
The tumor vaccine may not include one or more neoantigens that induce an autoimmune response against normal tissue in the subject.
The tumor vaccine may include an adjuvant.
The tumor vaccine may include an excipient.
A method disclosed herein may also include selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being presented on the tumor cell surface relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model.
A method disclosed herein may also include selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being capable of inducing a tumor-specific immune response in the subject relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model.
A method disclosed herein may also include selecting neoantigens that have an increased likelihood of being capable of being presented to naïve T cells by professional antigen presenting cells (APCs) relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model, optionally wherein the APC is a dendritic cell (DC).
A method disclosed herein may also include selecting neoantigens that have a decreased likelihood of being subject to inhibition via central or peripheral tolerance relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model.
A method disclosed herein may also include selecting neoantigens that have a decreased likelihood of being capable of inducing an autoimmune response to normal tissue in the subject relative to unselected neoantigens based on the presentation model.
The exome or transcriptome nucleotide sequencing data may be obtained by performing sequencing on the tumor tissue.
The sequencing may be next generation sequencing (NGS) or any massively parallel sequencing approach.
The set of numerical likelihoods may be further identified by at least MHC-allele interacting features comprising at least one of: the predicted affinity with which the MHC allele and the neoantigen encoded peptide bind; the predicted stability of the neoantigen encoded peptide-MHC complex; the sequence and length of the neoantigen encoded peptide; the probability of presentation of neoantigen encoded peptides with similar sequence in cells from other individuals expressing the particular MHC allele as assessed by mass-spectrometry proteomics or other means; the expression levels of the particular MHC allele in the subject in question (e.g. as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry); the overall neoantigen encoded peptide-sequence-independent probability of presentation by the particular MHC allele in other distinct subjects who express the particular MHC allele; the overall neoantigen encoded peptide-sequence-independent probability of presentation by MHC alleles in the same family of molecules (e.g., HLA-A, HLA-B, HLA-C, HLA-DQ, HLA-DR, HLA-DP) in other distinct subjects.
The set of numerical likelihoods are further identified by at least MHC-allele noninteracting features comprising at least one of: the C- and N-terminal sequences flanking the neoantigen encoded peptide within its source protein sequence; the presence of protease cleavage motifs in the neoantigen encoded peptide, optionally weighted according to the expression of corresponding proteases in the tumor cells (as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry); the turnover rate of the source protein as measured in the appropriate cell type; the length of the source protein, optionally considering the specific splice variants (“isoforms”) most highly expressed in the tumor cells as measured by RNA-seq or proteome mass spectrometry, or as predicted from the annotation of germline or somatic splicing mutations detected in DNA or RNA sequence data; the level of expression of the proteasome, immunoproteasome, thymoproteasome, or other proteases in the tumor cells (which may be measured by RNA-seq, proteome mass spectrometry, or immunohistochemistry); the expression of the source gene of the neoantigen encoded peptide (e.g., as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry); the typical tissue-specific expression of the source gene of the neoantigen encoded peptide during various stages of the cell cycle; a comprehensive catalog of features of the source protein and/or its domains as can be found in e.g. uniProt or PDB http://www.rcsb.org/pdb/home/home.do; features describing the properties of the domain of the source protein containing the peptide, for example: secondary or tertiary structure (e.g., alpha helix vs beta sheet); alternative splicing; the probability of presentation of peptides from the source protein of the neoantigen encoded peptide in question in other distinct subjects; the probability that the peptide will not be detected or over-represented by mass spectrometry due to technical biases; the expression of various gene modules/pathways as measured by RNASeq (which need not contain the source protein of the peptide) that are informative about the state of the tumor cells, stroma, or tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes (TILs); the copy number of the source gene of the neoantigen encoded peptide in the tumor cells; the probability that the peptide binds to the TAP or the measured or predicted binding affinity of the peptide to the TAP; the expression level of TAP in the tumor cells (which may be measured by RNA-seq, proteome mass spectrometry, immunohistochemistry); presence or absence of tumor mutations, including, but not limited to: driver mutations in known cancer driver genes such as EGFR, KRAS, ALK, RET, ROS1, TP53, CDKN2A, CDKN2B, NTRK1, NTRK2, NTRK3, and in genes encoding the proteins involved in the antigen presentation machinery (e.g., B2M, HLA-A, HLA-B, HLA-C, TAP-1, TAP-2, TAPBP, CALR, CNX, ERP57, HLA-DM, HLA-DMA, HLA-DMB, HLA-DO, HLA-DOA, HLA-DOB, HLA-DP, HLA-DPA1, HLA-DPB1, HLA-DQ, HLA-DQA1, HLA-DQA2, HLA-DQB1, HLA-DQB2, HLA-DR, HLA-DRA, HLA-DRB1, HLA-DRB3, HLA-DRB4, HLA-DRB5 or any of the genes coding for components of the proteasome or immunoproteasome). Peptides whose presentation relies on a component of the antigen-presentation machinery that is subject to loss-of-function mutation in the tumor have reduced probability of presentation; presence or absence of functional germline polymorphisms, including, but not limited to: in genes encoding the proteins involved in the antigen presentation machinery (e.g., B2M, HLA-A, HLA-B, HLA-C, TAP-1, TAP-2, TAPBP, CALR, CNX, ERP57, HLA-DM, HLA-DMA, HLA-DMB, HLA-DO, HLA-DOA, HLA-DOB, HLA-DP, HLA-DPA1, HLA-DPB1, HLA-DQ, HLA-DQA1, HLA-DQA2, HLA-DQB1, HLA-DQB2, HLA-DR, HLA-DRA, HLA-DRB1, HLA-DRB3, HLA-DRB4, HLA-DRB5 or any of the genes coding for components of the proteasome or immunoproteasome); tumor type (e.g., NSCLC, melanoma); clinical tumor subtype (e.g., squamous lung cancer vs. non-squamous); smoking history; the typical expression of the source gene of the peptide in the relevant tumor type or clinical subtype, optionally stratified by driver mutation.
The at least one alteration may be a frameshift or nonframeshift indel, missense or nonsense substitution, splice site alteration, genomic rearrangement or gene fusion, or any genomic or expression alteration giving rise to a neoORF.
The tumor cell may be selected from the group consisting of: lung cancer, melanoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, kidney cancer, gastric cancer, colon cancer, testicular cancer, head and neck cancer, pancreatic cancer, brain cancer, B-cell lymphoma, acute myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and T cell lymphocytic leukemia, non-small cell lung cancer, and small cell lung cancer.
A method disclosed herein may also include obtaining a tumor vaccine comprising the set of selected neoantigens or a subset thereof, optionally further comprising administering the tumor vaccine to the subject.
At least one of neoantigens in the set of selected neoantigens, when in polypeptide form, may include at least one of: a binding affinity with MHC with an IC50 value of less than 1000 nM, for MHC Class I polypeptides a length of 8-15, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 amino acids, for MHC Class II polypeptides a length of 6-30, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 amino acids, presence of sequence motifs within or near the polypeptide in the parent protein sequence promoting proteasome cleavage, and presence of sequence motifs promoting TAP transport. For MHC Class II, presence of sequence motifs within or near the peptide promoting cleavage by extracellular or lysosomal proteases (e.g., cathepsins) or HLA-DM catalyzed HLA binding.
Also disclosed herein is a methods for generating a model for identifying one or more neoantigens that are likely to be presented on a tumor cell surface of a tumor cell, comprising the steps of: receiving mass spectrometry data comprising data associated with a plurality of isolated peptides eluted from major histocompatibility complex (MHC) derived from a plurality of samples; obtaining a training data set by at least identifying a set of training peptide sequences present in the samples and one or more MHCs associated with each training peptide sequence; training a set of numerical parameters of a presentation model using the training data set comprising the training peptide sequences, the presentation model providing a plurality of numerical likelihoods that peptide sequences from the tumor cell are presented by one or more MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface.
The presentation model may represent dependence between: presence of a particular amino acid at a particular position of a peptide sequence; and likelihood of presentation, by one of the MHC alleles on the tumor cell, of the peptide sequence containing the particular amino acid at the particular position.
The samples can also include cell lines engineered to express a single MHC class I or class II allele.
The samples can also include cell lines engineered to express a plurality of MHC class I or class II alleles.
The samples can also include human cell lines obtained or derived from a plurality of patients.
The samples can also include fresh or frozen tumor samples obtained from a plurality of patients.
The samples can also include peptides identified using T-cell assays.
The training data set may further include data associated with: peptide abundance of the set of training peptides present in the samples; peptide length of the set of training peptides in the samples.
A method disclosed herein can also include obtaining a set of training protein sequences based on the training peptide sequences by comparing the set of training peptide sequences via alignment to a database comprising a set of known protein sequences, wherein the set of training protein sequences are longer than and include the training peptide sequences.
A method disclosed herein can also include performing or having performed mass spectrometry on a cell line to obtain at least one of exome, transcriptome, or whole genome nucleotide sequencing data from the cell line, the nucleotide sequencing data including at least one protein sequence including a mutation.
A method disclosed herein can also include: encoding the training peptide sequences using a one-hot encoding scheme.
A method disclosed herein can also include obtaining at least one of exome, transcriptome, and whole genome normal nucleotide sequencing data from normal tissue samples; and training the set of parameters of the presentation model using the normal nucleotide sequencing data.
The training data set may further include data associated with proteome sequences associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with MHC peptidome sequences associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with peptide-MHC binding affinity measurements for at least one of the isolated peptides.
The training data set may further include data associated with peptide-MHC binding stability measurements for at least one of the isolated peptides.
The training data set may further include data associated with transcriptomes associated with the samples.
The training data set may further include data associated with genomes associated with the samples.
A method disclosed herein may also include logistically regressing the set of parameters.
The training peptide sequences may be lengths within a range of k-mers where k is between 8-15, inclusive for MHC class I or 6-30, inclusive for MHC class II.
A method disclosed herein may also include encoding the training peptide sequences using a left-padded one-hot encoding scheme.
A method disclosed herein may also include determining values for the set of parameters using a deep learning algorithm.
Disclosed herein is are methods for identifying one or more neoantigens that are likely to be presented on a tumor cell surface of a tumor cell, comprising executing the steps of: receiving mass spectrometry data comprising data associated with a plurality of isolated peptides eluted from major histocompatibility complex (MHC) derived from a plurality of fresh or frozen tumor samples; obtaining a training data set by at least identifying a set of training peptide sequences present in the tumor samples and presented on one or more MHC alleles associated with each training peptide sequence; obtaining a set of training protein sequences based on the training peptide sequences; and training a set of numerical parameters of a presentation model using the training protein sequences and the training peptide sequences, the presentation model providing a plurality of numerical likelihoods that peptide sequences from the tumor cell are presented by one or more MHC alleles on the tumor cell surface.
The presentation model may represent dependence between: presence of a pair of a particular one of the MHC alleles and a particular amino acid at a particular position of a peptide sequence; and likelihood of presentation on the tumor cell surface, by the particular one of the MHC alleles of the pair, of such a peptide sequence comprising the particular amino acid at the particular position.
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has an increased likelihood that it is presented on the cell surface of the tumor relative to one or more distinct tumor neoantigens.
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has an increased likelihood that it is capable of inducing a tumor-specific immune response in the subject relative to one or more distinct tumor neoantigens.
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has an increased likelihood that it is capable of being presented to naïve T cells by professional antigen presenting cells (APCs) relative to one or more distinct tumor neoantigens, optionally wherein the APC is a dendritic cell (DC).
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has a decreased likelihood that it is subject to inhibition via central or peripheral tolerance relative to one or more distinct tumor neoantigens.
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has a decreased likelihood that it is capable of inducing an autoimmune response to normal tissue in the subject relative to one or more distinct tumor neoantigens.
A method disclosed herein can also include selecting a subset of neoantigens, wherein the subset of neoantigens is selected because each has a decreased likelihood that it will be differentially post-translationally modified in tumor cells versus APCs, optionally wherein the APC is a dendritic cell (DC).
The practice of the methods herein will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology, within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, e.g., T. E. Creighton, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties (W. H. Freeman and Company, 1993); A. L. Lehninger, Biochemistry (Worth Publishers, Inc., current addition); Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2nd Edition, 1989); Methods In Enzymology (S. Colowick and N. Kaplan eds., Academic Press, Inc.); Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition (Easton, Pennsylvania: Mack Publishing Company, 1990); Carey and Sundberg Advanced Organic Chemistry 3rd Ed. (Plenum Press) Vols A and B(1992).
Also disclosed herein are methods for the identification of certain mutations (e.g., the variants or alleles that are present in cancer cells). In particular, these mutations can be present in the genome, transcriptome, proteome, or exome of cancer cells of a subject having cancer but not in normal tissue from the subject.
Genetic mutations in tumors can be considered useful for the immunological targeting of tumors if they lead to changes in the amino acid sequence of a protein exclusively in the tumor. Useful mutations include: (1) non-synonymous mutations leading to different amino acids in the protein; (2) read-through mutations in which a stop codon is modified or deleted, leading to translation of a longer protein with a novel tumor-specific sequence at the C-terminus; (3) splice site mutations that lead to the inclusion of an intron in the mature mRNA and thus a unique tumor-specific protein sequence; (4) chromosomal rearrangements that give rise to a chimeric protein with tumor-specific sequences at the junction of 2 proteins (i.e., gene fusion); (5) frameshift mutations or deletions that lead to a new open reading frame with a novel tumor-specific protein sequence. Mutations can also include one or more of nonframeshift indel, missense or nonsense substitution, splice site alteration, genomic rearrangement or gene fusion, or any genomic or expression alteration giving rise to a neoORF.
Peptides with mutations or mutated polypeptides arising from for example, splice-site, frameshift, readthrough, or gene fusion mutations in tumor cells can be identified by sequencing DNA, RNA or protein in tumor versus normal cells.
Also mutations can include previously identified tumor specific mutations. Known tumor mutations can be found at the Catalogue of Somatic Mutations in Cancer (COSMIC) database.
A variety of methods are available for detecting the presence of a particular mutation or allele in an individual's DNA or RNA. Advancements in this field have provided accurate, easy, and inexpensive large-scale SNP genotyping. For example, several techniques have been described including dynamic allele-specific hybridization (DASH), microplate array diagonal gel electrophoresis (MADGE), pyrosequencing, oligonucleotide-specific ligation, the TaqMan system as well as various DNA “chip” technologies such as the Affymetrix SNP chips. These methods utilize amplification of a target genetic region, typically by PCR. Still other methods, based on the generation of small signal molecules by invasive cleavage followed by mass spectrometry or immobilized padlock probes and rolling-circle amplification. Several of the methods known in the art for detecting specific mutations are summarized below.
PCR based detection means can include multiplex amplification of a plurality of markers simultaneously. For example, it is well known in the art to select PCR primers to generate PCR products that do not overlap in size and can be analyzed simultaneously. Alternatively, it is possible to amplify different markers with primers that are differentially labeled and thus can each be differentially detected. Of course, hybridization based detection means allow the differential detection of multiple PCR products in a sample. Other techniques are known in the art to allow multiplex analyses of a plurality of markers.
Several methods have been developed to facilitate analysis of single nucleotide polymorphisms in genomic DNA or cellular RNA. For example, a single base polymorphism can be detected by using a specialized exonuclease-resistant nucleotide, as disclosed, e.g., in Mundy, C. R. (U.S. Pat. No. 4,656,127). According to the method, a primer complementary to the allelic sequence immediately 3′ to the polymorphic site is permitted to hybridize to a target molecule obtained from a particular animal or human. If the polymorphic site on the target molecule contains a nucleotide that is complementary to the particular exonuclease-resistant nucleotide derivative present, then that derivative will be incorporated onto the end of the hybridized primer. Such incorporation renders the primer resistant to exonuclease, and thereby permits its detection. Since the identity of the exonuclease-resistant derivative of the sample is known, a finding that the primer has become resistant to exonucleases reveals that the nucleotide(s) present in the polymorphic site of the target molecule is complementary to that of the nucleotide derivative used in the reaction. This method has the advantage that it does not require the determination of large amounts of extraneous sequence data.
A solution-based method can be used for determining the identity of a nucleotide of a polymorphic site. Cohen, D. et al. (French Patent 2,650,840; PCT Appln. No. WO91/02087). As in the Mundy method of U.S. Pat. No. 4,656,127, a primer is employed that is complementary to allelic sequences immediately 3′ to a polymorphic site. The method determines the identity of the nucleotide of that site using labeled dideoxynucleotide derivatives, which, if complementary to the nucleotide of the polymorphic site will become incorporated onto the terminus of the primer.
An alternative method, known as Genetic Bit Analysis or GBA is described by Goelet, P. et al. (PCT Appln. No. 92/15712). The method of Goelet, P. et al. uses mixtures of labeled terminators and a primer that is complementary to the sequence 3′ to a polymorphic site. The labeled terminator that is incorporated is thus determined by, and complementary to, the nucleotide present in the polymorphic site of the target molecule being evaluated. In contrast to the method of Cohen et al. (French Patent 2,650,840; PCT Appln. No. WO91/02087) the method of Goelet, P. et al. can be a heterogeneous phase assay, in which the primer or the target molecule is immobilized to a solid phase.
Several primer-guided nucleotide incorporation procedures for assaying polymorphic sites in DNA have been described (Komher, J. S. et al., Nucl. Acids. Res. 17:7779-7784 (1989); Sokolov, B. P., Nucl. Acids Res. 18:3671 (1990); Syvanen, A.-C., et al., Genomics 8:684-692 (1990); Kuppuswamy, M. N. et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. (U.S.A.) 88:1143-1147 (1991); Prezant, T. R. et al., Hum. Mutat. 1:159-164 (1992); Ugozzoli, L. et al., GATA 9:107-112 (1992); Nyren, P. et al., Anal. Biochem. 208:171-175 (1993)). These methods differ from GBA in that they utilize incorporation of labeled deoxynucleotides to discriminate between bases at a polymorphic site. In such a format, since the signal is proportional to the number of deoxynucleotides incorporated, polymorphisms that occur in runs of the same nucleotide can result in signals that are proportional to the length of the run (Syvanen, A.-C., et al., Amer. J. Hum. Genet. 52:46-59 (1993)).
A number of initiatives obtain sequence information directly from millions of individual molecules of DNA or RNA in parallel. Real-time single molecule sequencing-by-synthesis technologies rely on the detection of fluorescent nucleotides as they are incorporated into a nascent strand of DNA that is complementary to the template being sequenced. In one method, oligonucleotides 30-50 bases in length are covalently anchored at the 5′ end to glass cover slips. These anchored strands perform two functions. First, they act as capture sites for the target template strands if the templates are configured with capture tails complementary to the surface-bound oligonucleotides. They also act as primers for the template directed primer extension that forms the basis of the sequence reading. The capture primers function as a fixed position site for sequence determination using multiple cycles of synthesis, detection, and chemical cleavage of the dye-linker to remove the dye. Each cycle consists of adding the polymerase/labeled nucleotide mixture, rinsing, imaging and cleavage of dye. In an alternative method, polymerase is modified with a fluorescent donor molecule and immobilized on a glass slide, while each nucleotide is color-coded with an acceptor fluorescent moiety attached to a gamma-phosphate. The system detects the interaction between a fluorescently-tagged polymerase and a fluorescently modified nucleotide as the nucleotide becomes incorporated into the de novo chain. Other sequencing-by-synthesis technologies also exist.
Any suitable sequencing-by-synthesis platform can be used to identify mutations. As described above, four major sequencing-by-synthesis platforms are currently available: the Genome Sequencers from Roche/454 Life Sciences, the 1 G Analyzer from Illumina/Solexa, the SOLiD system from Applied BioSystems, and the Heliscope system from Helicos Biosciences. Sequencing-by-synthesis platforms have also been described by Pacific BioSciences and VisiGen Biotechnologies. In some embodiments, a plurality of nucleic acid molecules being sequenced is bound to a support (e.g., solid support). To immobilize the nucleic acid on a support, a capture sequence/universal priming site can be added at the 3′ and/or 5′ end of the template. The nucleic acids can be bound to the support by hybridizing the capture sequence to a complementary sequence covalently attached to the support. The capture sequence (also referred to as a universal capture sequence) is a nucleic acid sequence complementary to a sequence attached to a support that may dually serve as a universal primer.
As an alternative to a capture sequence, a member of a coupling pair (such as, e.g., antibody/antigen, receptor/ligand, or the avidin-biotin pair as described in, e.g., US Patent Application No. 2006/0252077) can be linked to each fragment to be captured on a surface coated with a respective second member of that coupling pair.
Subsequent to the capture, the sequence can be analyzed, for example, by single molecule detection/sequencing, e.g., as described in the Examples and in U.S. Pat. No. 7,283,337, including template-dependent sequencing-by-synthesis. In sequencing-by-synthesis, the surface-bound molecule is exposed to a plurality of labeled nucleotide triphosphates in the presence of polymerase. The sequence of the template is determined by the order of labeled nucleotides incorporated into the 3′ end of the growing chain. This can be done in real time or can be done in a step-and-repeat mode. For real-time analysis, different optical labels to each nucleotide can be incorporated and multiple lasers can be utilized for stimulation of incorporated nucleotides.
Sequencing can also include other massively parallel sequencing or next generation sequencing (NGS) techniques and platforms. Additional examples of massively parallel sequencing techniques and platforms are the Illumina HiSeq or MiSeq, Thermo PGM or Proton, the Pac Bio RS II or Sequel, Qiagen's Gene Reader, and the Oxford Nanopore MinION. Additional similar current massively parallel sequencing technologies can be used, as well as future generations of these technologies.
Any cell type or tissue can be utilized to obtain nucleic acid samples for use in methods described herein. For example, a DNA or RNA sample can be obtained from a tumor or a bodily fluid, e.g., blood, obtained by known techniques (e.g. venipuncture) or saliva. Alternatively, nucleic acid tests can be performed on dry samples (e.g. hair or skin). In addition, a sample can be obtained for sequencing from a tumor and another sample can be obtained from normal tissue for sequencing where the normal tissue is of the same tissue type as the tumor. A sample can be obtained for sequencing from a tumor and another sample can be obtained from normal tissue for sequencing where the normal tissue is of a distinct tissue type relative to the tumor.
Tumors can include one or more of lung cancer, melanoma, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, kidney cancer, gastric cancer, colon cancer, testicular cancer, head and neck cancer, pancreatic cancer, brain cancer, B-cell lymphoma, acute myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and T cell lymphocytic leukemia, non-small cell lung cancer, and small cell lung cancer.
Alternatively, protein mass spectrometry can be used to identify or validate the presence of mutated peptides bound to MHC proteins on tumor cells. Peptides can be acid-eluted from tumor cells or from HLA molecules that are immunoprecipitated from tumor, and then identified using mass spectrometry.
Neoantigens can include nucleotides or polypeptides. For example, a neoantigen can be an RNA sequence that encodes for a polypeptide sequence. Neoantigens useful in vaccines can therefore include nucleotide sequences or polypeptide sequences.
Disclosed herein are isolated peptides that comprise tumor specific mutations identified by the methods disclosed herein, peptides that comprise known tumor specific mutations, and mutant polypeptides or fragments thereof identified by methods disclosed herein. Neoantigen peptides can be described in the context of their coding sequence where a neoantigen includes the nucleotide sequence (e.g., DNA or RNA) that codes for the related polypeptide sequence.
One or more polypeptides encoded by a neoantigen nucleotide sequence can comprise at least one of: a binding affinity with MHC with an IC50 value of less than 1000 nM, for MHC Class I peptides a length of 8-15, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 amino acids, presence of sequence motifs within or near the peptide promoting proteasome cleavage, and presence or sequence motifs promoting TAP transport. For MHC Class II peptides a length 6-30, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 amino acids, presence of sequence motifs within or near the peptide promoting cleavage by extracellular or lysosomal proteases (e.g., cathepsins) or HLA-DM catalyzed HLA binding.
One or more neoantigens can be presented on the surface of a tumor.
One or more neoantigens can be is immunogenic in a subject having a tumor, e.g., capable of eliciting a T cell response or a B cell response in the subject.
One or more neoantigens that induce an autoimmune response in a subject can be excluded from consideration in the context of vaccine generation for a subject having a tumor.
The size of at least one neoantigenic peptide molecule can comprise, but is not limited to, about 5, about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, about 10, about 11, about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19, about 20, about 21, about 22, about 23, about 24, about 25, about 26, about 27, about 28, about 29, about 30, about 31, about 32, about 33, about 34, about 35, about 36, about 37, about 38, about 39, about 40, about 41, about 42, about 43, about 44, about 45, about 46, about 47, about 48, about 49, about 50, about 60, about 70, about 80, about 90, about 100, about 110, about 120 or greater amino molecule residues, and any range derivable therein. In specific embodiments the neoantigenic peptide molecules are equal to or less than 50 amino acids.
Neoantigenic peptides and polypeptides can be: for MHC Class 115 residues or less in length and usually consist of between about 8 and about 11 residues, particularly 9 or 10 residues; for MHC Class II, 6-30 residues, inclusive.
If desirable, a longer peptide can be designed in several ways. In one case, when presentation likelihoods of peptides on HLA alleles are predicted or known, a longer peptide could consist of either: (1) individual presented peptides with an extensions of 2-5 amino acids toward the N- and C-terminus of each corresponding gene product; (2) a concatenation of some or all of the presented peptides with extended sequences for each. In another case, when sequencing reveals a long (>10 residues) neoepitope sequence present in the tumor (e.g. due to a frameshift, read-through or intron inclusion that leads to a novel peptide sequence), a longer peptide would consist of: (3) the entire stretch of novel tumor-specific amino acids—thus bypassing the need for computational or in vitro test-based selection of the strongest HLA-presented shorter peptide. In both cases, use of a longer peptide allows endogenous processing by patient cells and may lead to more effective antigen presentation and induction of T cell responses.
Neoantigenic peptides and polypeptides can be presented on an HLA protein. In some aspects neoantigenic peptides and polypeptides are presented on an HLA protein with greater affinity than a wild-type peptide. In some aspects, a neoantigenic peptide or polypeptide can have an IC50 of at least less than 5000 nM, at least less than 1000 nM, at least less than 500 nM, at least less than 250 nM, at least less than 200 nM, at least less than 150 nM, at least less than 100 nM, at least less than 50 nM or less.
In some aspects, neoantigenic peptides and polypeptides do not induce an autoimmune response and/or invoke immunological tolerance when administered to a subject.
Also provided are compositions comprising at least two or more neoantigenic peptides. In some embodiments the composition contains at least two distinct peptides. At least two distinct peptides can be derived from the same polypeptide. By distinct polypeptides is meant that the peptide vary by length, amino acid sequence, or both. The peptides are derived from any polypeptide known to or have been found to contain a tumor specific mutation. Suitable polypeptides from which the neoantigenic peptides can be derived can be found for example in the COSMIC database. COSMIC curates comprehensive information on somatic mutations in human cancer. The peptide contains the tumor specific mutation. In some aspects the tumor specific mutation is a driver mutation for a particular cancer type.
Neoantigenic peptides and polypeptides having a desired activity or property can be modified to provide certain desired attributes, e.g., improved pharmacological characteristics, while increasing or at least retaining substantially all of the biological activity of the unmodified peptide to bind the desired MHC molecule and activate the appropriate T cell. For instance, neoantigenic peptide and polypeptides can be subject to various changes, such as substitutions, either conservative or non-conservative, where such changes might provide for certain advantages in their use, such as improved MHC binding, stability or presentation. By conservative substitutions is meant replacing an amino acid residue with another which is biologically and/or chemically similar, e.g., one hydrophobic residue for another, or one polar residue for another. The substitutions include combinations such as Gly, Ala; Val, Ile, Leu, Met; Asp, Glu; Asn, Gln; Ser, Thr; Lys, Arg; and Phe, Tyr. The effect of single amino acid substitutions may also be probed using D-amino acids. Such modifications can be made using well known peptide synthesis procedures, as described in e.g., Merrifield, Science 232:341-347 (1986), Barany & Merrifield, The Peptides, Gross & Meienhofer, eds. (N.Y., Academic Press), pp. 1-284 (1979); and Stewart & Young, Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, (Rockford, Ill., Pierce), 2d Ed. (1984).
Modifications of peptides and polypeptides with various amino acid mimetics or unnatural amino acids can be particularly useful in increasing the stability of the peptide and polypeptide in vivo. Stability can be assayed in a number of ways. For instance, peptidases and various biological media, such as human plasma and serum, have been used to test stability. See, e.g., Verhoef et al., Eur. J. Drug Metab Pharmacokin. 11:291-302 (1986). Half-life of the peptides can be conveniently determined using a 25% human serum (v/v) assay. The protocol is generally as follows. Pooled human serum (Type AB, non-heat inactivated) is delipidated by centrifugation before use. The serum is then diluted to 25% with RPMI tissue culture media and used to test peptide stability. At predetermined time intervals a small amount of reaction solution is removed and added to either 6% aqueous trichloracetic acid or ethanol. The cloudy reaction sample is cooled (4 degrees C.) for 15 minutes and then spun to pellet the precipitated serum proteins. The presence of the peptides is then determined by reversed-phase HPLC using stability-specific chromatography conditions.
The peptides and polypeptides can be modified to provide desired attributes other than improved serum half-life. For instance, the ability of the peptides to induce CTL activity can be enhanced by linkage to a sequence which contains at least one epitope that is capable of inducing a T helper cell response. Immunogenic peptides/T helper conjugates can be linked by a spacer molecule. The spacer is typically comprised of relatively small, neutral molecules, such as amino acids or amino acid mimetics, which are substantially uncharged under physiological conditions. The spacers are typically selected from, e.g., Ala, Gly, or other neutral spacers of nonpolar amino acids or neutral polar amino acids. It will be understood that the optionally present spacer need not be comprised of the same residues and thus can be a hetero- or homo-oligomer. When present, the spacer will usually be at least one or two residues, more usually three to six residues. Alternatively, the peptide can be linked to the T helper peptide without a spacer.
A neoantigenic peptide can be linked to the T helper peptide either directly or via a spacer either at the amino or carboxy terminus of the peptide. The amino terminus of either the neoantigenic peptide or the T helper peptide can be acylated. Exemplary T helper peptides include tetanus toxoid 830-843, influenza 307-319, malaria circumsporozoite 382-398 and 378-389.
Proteins or peptides can be made by any technique known to those of skill in the art, including the expression of proteins, polypeptides or peptides through standard molecular biological techniques, the isolation of proteins or peptides from natural sources, or the chemical synthesis of proteins or peptides. The nucleotide and protein, polypeptide and peptide sequences corresponding to various genes have been previously disclosed, and can be found at computerized databases known to those of ordinary skill in the art. One such database is the National Center for Biotechnology Information's Genbank and GenPept databases located at the National Institutes of Health website. The coding regions for known genes can be amplified and/or expressed using the techniques disclosed herein or as would be known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Alternatively, various commercial preparations of proteins, polypeptides and peptides are known to those of skill in the art.
In a further aspect a neoantigen includes a nucleic acid (e.g. polynucleotide) that encodes a neoantigenic peptide or portion thereof. The polynucleotide can be, e.g., DNA, cDNA, PNA, CNA, RNA (e.g., mRNA), either single- and/or double-stranded, or native or stabilized forms of polynucleotides, such as, e.g., polynucleotides with a phosphorothiate backbone, or combinations thereof and it may or may not contain introns. A still further aspect provides an expression vector capable of expressing a polypeptide or portion thereof. Expression vectors for different cell types are well known in the art and can be selected without undue experimentation. Generally, DNA is inserted into an expression vector, such as a plasmid, in proper orientation and correct reading frame for expression. If necessary, DNA can be linked to the appropriate transcriptional and translational regulatory control nucleotide sequences recognized by the desired host, although such controls are generally available in the expression vector. The vector is then introduced into the host through standard techniques. Guidance can be found e.g. in Sambrook et al. (1989) Molecular Cloning, A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
Also disclosed herein is an immunogenic composition, e.g., a vaccine composition, capable of raising a specific immune response, e.g., a tumor-specific immune response. Vaccine compositions typically comprise a plurality of neoantigens, e.g., selected using a method described herein. Vaccine compositions can also be referred to as vaccines.
A vaccine can contain between 1 and 30 peptides, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 different peptides, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 11, 12, 13, or 14 different peptides, or 12, 13 or 14 different peptides. Peptides can include post-translational modifications. A vaccine can contain between 1 and 100 or more nucleotide sequences, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 or more different nucleotide sequences, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 11, 12, 13, or 14 different nucleotide sequences, or 12, 13 or 14 different nucleotide sequences. A vaccine can contain between 1 and 30 neoantigen sequences, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 or more different neoantigen sequences, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 11, 12, 13, or 14 different neoantigen sequences, or 12, 13 or 14 different neoantigen sequences.
In one embodiment, different peptides and/or polypeptides or nucleotide sequences encoding them are selected so that the peptides and/or polypeptides capable of associating with different MHC molecules, such as different MHC class I molecules and/or different MHC class II molecules. In some aspects, one vaccine composition comprises coding sequence for peptides and/or polypeptides capable of associating with the most frequently occurring MHC class I molecules and/or different MHC class II molecules. Hence, vaccine compositions can comprise different fragments capable of associating with at least 2 preferred, at least 3 preferred, or at least 4 preferred MHC class I molecules and/or different MHC class II molecules.
The vaccine composition can be capable of raising a specific cytotoxic T-cells response and/or a specific helper T-cell response.
A vaccine composition can further comprise an adjuvant and/or a carrier. Examples of useful adjuvants and carriers are given herein below. A composition can be associated with a carrier such as e.g. a protein or an antigen-presenting cell such as e.g. a dendritic cell (DC) capable of presenting the peptide to a T-cell.
Adjuvants are any substance whose admixture into a vaccine composition increases or otherwise modifies the immune response to a neoantigen. Carriers can be scaffold structures, for example a polypeptide or a polysaccharide, to which a neoantigen, is capable of being associated. Optionally, adjuvants are conjugated covalently or non-covalently.
The ability of an adjuvant to increase an immune response to an antigen is typically manifested by a significant or substantial increase in an immune-mediated reaction, or reduction in disease symptoms. For example, an increase in humoral immunity is typically manifested by a significant increase in the titer of antibodies raised to the antigen, and an increase in T-cell activity is typically manifested in increased cell proliferation, or cellular cytotoxicity, or cytokine secretion. An adjuvant may also alter an immune response, for example, by changing a primarily humoral or Th response into a primarily cellular, or Th response.
Suitable adjuvants include, but are not limited to 1018 ISS, alum, aluminium salts, Amplivax, AS15, BCG, CP-870,893, CpG7909, CyaA, dSLIM, GM-CSF, IC30, IC31, Imiquimod, ImuFact IMP321, IS Patch, ISS, ISCOMATRIX, JuvImmune, LipoVac, MF59, monophosphoryl lipid A, Montanide IMS 1312, Montanide ISA 206, Montanide ISA 50V, Montanide ISA-51, OK-432, OM-174, OM-197-MP-EC, ONTAK, PepTel vector system, PLG microparticles, resiquimod, SRL172, Virosomes and other Virus-like particles, YF-17D, VEGF trap, R848, beta-glucan, Pam3Cys, Aquila's QS21 stimulon (Aquila Biotech, Worcester, Mass., USA) which is derived from saponin, mycobacterial extracts and synthetic bacterial cell wall mimics, and other proprietary adjuvants such as Ribi's Detox. Quil or Superfos. Adjuvants such as incomplete Freund's or GM-CSF are useful. Several immunological adjuvants (e.g., MF59) specific for dendritic cells and their preparation have been described previously (Dupuis M, et al., Cell Immunol. 1998; 186(1):18-27; Allison A C; Dev Biol Stand. 1998; 92:3-11). Also cytokines can be used. Several cytokines have been directly linked to influencing dendritic cell migration to lymphoid tissues (e.g., TNF-alpha), accelerating the maturation of dendritic cells into efficient antigen-presenting cells for T-lymphocytes (e.g., GM-CSF, IL-1 and IL-4) (U.S. Pat. No. 5,849,589, specifically incorporated herein by reference in its entirety) and acting as immunoadjuvants (e.g., IL-12) (Gabrilovich D I, et al., J Immunother Emphasis Tumor Immunol. 1996 (6):414-418).
CpG immunostimulatory oligonucleotides have also been reported to enhance the effects of adjuvants in a vaccine setting. Other TLR binding molecules such as RNA binding TLR 7, TLR 8 and/or TLR 9 may also be used.
Other examples of useful adjuvants include, but are not limited to, chemically modified CpGs (e.g. CpR, Idera), Poly(I:C)(e.g. polyi:CI2U), non-CpG bacterial DNA or RNA as well as immunoactive small molecules and antibodies such as cyclophosphamide, sunitinib, bevacizumab, celebrex, NCX-4016, sildenafil, tadalafil, vardenafil, sorafinib, XL-999, CP-547632, pazopanib, ZD2171, AZD2171, ipilimumab, tremelimumab, and SC58175, which may act therapeutically and/or as an adjuvant. The amounts and concentrations of adjuvants and additives can readily be determined by the skilled artisan without undue experimentation. Additional adjuvants include colony-stimulating factors, such as Granulocyte Macrophage Colony Stimulating Factor (GM-CSF, sargramostim).
A vaccine composition can comprise more than one different adjuvant. Furthermore, a therapeutic composition can comprise any adjuvant substance including any of the above or combinations thereof. It is also contemplated that a vaccine and an adjuvant can be administered together or separately in any appropriate sequence.
A carrier (or excipient) can be present independently of an adjuvant. The function of a carrier can for example be to increase the molecular weight of in particular mutant to increase activity or immunogenicity, to confer stability, to increase the biological activity, or to increase serum half-life. Furthermore, a carrier can aid presenting peptides to T-cells. A carrier can be any suitable carrier known to the person skilled in the art, for example a protein or an antigen presenting cell. A carrier protein could be but is not limited to keyhole limpet hemocyanin, serum proteins such as transferrin, bovine serum albumin, human serum albumin, thyroglobulin or ovalbumin, immunoglobulins, or hormones, such as insulin or palmitic acid. For immunization of humans, the carrier is generally a physiologically acceptable carrier acceptable to humans and safe. However, tetanus toxoid and/or diptheria toxoid are suitable carriers. Alternatively, the carrier can be dextrans for example sepharose.
Cytotoxic T-cells (CTLs) recognize an antigen in the form of a peptide bound to an MHC molecule rather than the intact foreign antigen itself. The MHC molecule itself is located at the cell surface of an antigen presenting cell. Thus, an activation of CTLs is possible if a trimeric complex of peptide antigen, MHC molecule, and APC is present. Correspondingly, it may enhance the immune response if not only the peptide is used for activation of CTLs, but if additionally APCs with the respective MHC molecule are added. Therefore, in some embodiments a vaccine composition additionally contains at least one antigen presenting cell.
Neoantigens can also be included in viral vector-based vaccine platforms, such as vaccinia, fowlpox, self-replicating alphavirus, marabavirus, adenovirus (See, e.g., Tatsis et al., Adenoviruses, Molecular Therapy (2004) 10, 616-629), or lentivirus, including but not limited to second, third or hybrid second/third generation lentivirus and recombinant lentivirus of any generation designed to target specific cell types or receptors (See, e.g., Hu et al., Immunization Delivered by Lentiviral Vectors for Cancer and Infectious Diseases, Immunol Rev. (2011) 239(1): 45-61, Sakuma et al., Lentiviral vectors: basic to translational, Biochem J. (2012) 443(3):603-18, Cooper et al., Rescue of splicing-mediated intron loss maximizes expression in lentiviral vectors containing the human ubiquitin C promoter, Nucl. Acids Res. (2015) 43 (1): 682-690, Zufferey et al., Self-Inactivating Lentivirus Vector for Safe and Efficient In Vivo Gene Delivery, J. Virol. (1998) 72 (12): 9873-9880). Dependent on the packaging capacity of the above mentioned viral vector-based vaccine platforms, this approach can deliver one or more nucleotide sequences that encode one or more neoantigen peptides. The sequences may be flanked by non-mutated sequences, may be separated by linkers or may be preceded with one or more sequences targeting a subcellular compartment (See, e.g., Gros et al., Prospective identification of neoantigen-specific lymphocytes in the peripheral blood of melanoma patients, Nat Med. (2016) 22 (4):433-8, Stronen et al., Targeting of cancer neoantigens with donor-derived T cell receptor repertoires, Science. (2016) 352 (6291):1337-41, Lu et al., Efficient identification of mutated cancer antigens recognized by T cells associated with durable tumor regressions, Clin Cancer Res. (2014) 20(13):3401-10). Upon introduction into a host, infected cells express the neoantigens, and thereby elicit a host immune (e.g., CTL) response against the peptide(s). Vaccinia vectors and methods useful in immunization protocols are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,722,848. Another vector is BCG (Bacille Calmette Guerin). BCG vectors are described in Stover et al. (Nature 351:456-460 (1991)). A wide variety of other vaccine vectors useful for therapeutic administration or immunization of neoantigens, e.g., Salmonella typhi vectors, and the like will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the description herein.
V.A. Neoantigen Cassette
The methods employed for the selection of one or more neoantigens, the cloning and construction of a “cassette” and its insertion into a viral vector are within the skill in the art given the teachings provided herein. By “neoantigen cassette” is meant the combination of a selected neoantigen or plurality of neoantigens and the other regulatory elements necessary to transcribe the neoantigen(s) and express the transcribed product. A neoantigen or plurality of neoantigens can be operatively linked to regulatory components in a manner which permits transcription. Such components include conventional regulatory elements that can drive expression of the neoantigen(s) in a cell transfected with the viral vector. Thus the neoantigen cassette can also contain a selected promoter which is linked to the neoantigen(s) and located, with other, optional regulatory elements, within the selected viral sequences of the recombinant vector.
Useful promoters can be constitutive promoters or regulated (inducible) promoters, which will enable control of the amount of neoantigen(s) to be expressed. For example, a desirable promoter is that of the cytomegalovirus immediate early promoter/enhancer [see, e.g., Boshart et al, Cell, 41:521-530 (1985)]. Another desirable promoter includes the Rous sarcoma virus LTR promoter/enhancer. Still another promoter/enhancer sequence is the chicken cytoplasmic beta-actin promoter [T. A. Kost et al, Nucl. Acids Res., 11(23):8287 (1983)]. Other suitable or desirable promoters can be selected by one of skill in the art.
The neoantigen cassette can also include nucleic acid sequences heterologous to the viral vector sequences including sequences providing signals for efficient polyadenylation of the transcript (poly(A), poly-A or pA) and introns with functional splice donor and acceptor sites. A common poly-A sequence which is employed in the exemplary vectors of this invention is that derived from the papovavirus SV-40. The poly-A sequence generally can be inserted in the cassette following the neoantigen-based sequences and before the viral vector sequences. A common intron sequence can also be derived from SV-40, and is referred to as the SV-40 T intron sequence. A neoantigen cassette can also contain such an intron, located between the promoter/enhancer sequence and the neoantigen(s). Selection of these and other common vector elements are conventional [see, e.g., Sambrook et al, “Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual.”, 2d edit., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York (1989) and references cited therein] and many such sequences are available from commercial and industrial sources as well as from Genbank.
A neoantigen cassette can have one or more neoantigens. For example, a given cassette can include 1-10, 1-20, 1-30, 10-20, 15-25, 15-20, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or more neoantigens. Neoantigens can be linked directly to one another. Neoantigens can also be linked to one another with linkers. Neoantigens can be in any orientation relative to one another including N to C or C to N.
As above stated, the neoantigen cassette can be located in the site of any selected deletion in the viral vector, such as the site of the E1 gene region deletion or E3 gene region deletion, among others which may be selected.
The neoantigen cassette can be described using the following formula to describe the ordered sequence of each element, from 5′ to 3′:
(Pa-(L5b-Nc-L3d)X)Z-(P2h-(G5e-Uf)Y)W-G3g
wherein P and P2 comprise promoter nucleotide sequences, N comprises an MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence, L5 comprises a 5′ linker sequence, L3 comprises a 3′ linker sequence, G5 comprises a nucleic acid sequences encoding an amino acid linker, G3 comprises one of the at least one nucleic acid sequences encoding an amino acid linker, U comprises an MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence, where for each X the corresponding Nc is a epitope encoding nucleic acid sequence, where for each Y the corresponding Uf is an antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence. The composition and ordered sequence can be further defined by selecting the number of elements present, for example where a=0 or 1, where b=0 or 1, where c=1, where d=0 or 1, where e=0 or 1, where f=1, where g=0 or 1, where h=0 or 1, X=1 to 400, Y=0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, Z=1 to 400, and W=0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
In one example, elements present include where a=0, b=1, d=1, e=1, g=1, h=0, X=10, Y=2, Z=1, and W=1, describing where no additional promoter is present (i.e. only the promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone is present), 20 MHC class I epitope are present, a 5′ linker is present for each N, a 3′ linker is present for each N, 2 MHC class II epitopes are present, a linker is present linking the two MHC class II epitopes, a linker is present linking the 5′ end of the two MHC class II epitopes to the 3′ linker of the final MHC class I epitope, and a linker is present linking the 3′ end of the two MHC class II epitopes to the to the RNA alphavirus backbone. Examples of linking the 3′ end of the neoantigen cassette to the RNA alphavirus backbone include linking directly to the 3′ UTR elements provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone, such as a 3′ 19-nt CSE. Examples of linking the 5′ end of the neoantigen cassette to the RNA alphavirus backbone include linking directly to a 26S promoter sequence, an alphavirus 5′ UTR, a 51-nt CSE, or a 24-nt CSE.
Other examples include: where a=1 describing where a promoter other than the promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone is present; where a=1 and Z is greater than 1 where multiple promoters other than the promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone are present each driving expression of 1 or more distinct MHC class I epitope encoding nucleic acid sequences; where h=1 describing where a separate promoter is present to drive expression of the MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequences; and where g=0 describing the MHC class II antigen-encoding nucleic acid sequence, if present, is directly linked to the RNA alphavirus backbone.
Other examples include where each MHC class I epitope that is present can have a 5′ linker, a 3′ linker, neither, or both. In examples where more than one MHC class I epitope is present in the same neoantigen cassette, some MHC class I epitopes may have both a 5′ linker and a 3′ linker, while other MHC class I epitopes may have either a 5′ linker, a 3′ linker, or neither. In other examples where more than one MHC class I epitope is present in the same neoantigen cassette, some MHC class I epitopes may have either a 5′ linker or a 3′ linker, while other MHC class I epitopes may have either a 5′ linker, a 3′ linker, or neither.
In examples where more than one MHC class II epitope is present in the same neoantigen cassette, some MHC class II epitopes may have both a 5′ linker and a 3′ linker, while other MHC class II epitopes may have either a 5′ linker, a 3′ linker, or neither. In other examples where more than one MHC class II epitope is present in the same neoantigen cassette, some MHC class II epitopes may have either a 5′ linker or a 3′ linker, while other MHC class II epitopes may have either a 5′ linker, a 3′ linker, or neither.
The promoter nucleotide sequences P and/or P2 can be the same as a promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone. For example, the promoter sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone, Pn and P2, can each comprise a 26S subgenomic promoter. The promoter nucleotide sequences P and/or P2 can be different from the promoter nucleotide sequence provided by the RNA alphavirus backbone, as well as can be different from each other.
The 5′ linker L5 can be a native sequence or a non-natural sequence. Non-natural sequence include, but are not limited to, AAY, RR, and DPP. The 3′ linker L3 can also be a native sequence or a non-natural sequence. Additionally, L5 and L3 can both be native sequences, both be non-natural sequences, or one can be native and the other non-natural. For each X, the amino acid linkers can be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 or more amino acids in length. For each X, the amino acid linkers can be also be at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 16, at least 17, at least 18, at least 19, at least 20, at least 21, at least 22, at least 23, at least 24, at least 25, at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, or at least 30 amino acids in length.
The amino acid linker G5, for each Y, can be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 or more amino acids in length. For each Y, the amino acid linkers can be also be at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 16, at least 17, at least 18, at least 19, at least 20, at least 21, at least 22, at least 23, at least 24, at least 25, at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, or at least 30 amino acids in length.
The amino acid linker G3 can be 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100 or more amino acids in length. G3 can be also be at least 3, at least 4, at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 16, at least 17, at least 18, at least 19, at least 20, at least 21, at least 22, at least 23, at least 24, at least 25, at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, or at least 30 amino acids in length.
For each X, each N can encodes a MHC class I epitope 7-15 amino acids in length. For each X, each N can also encodes a MHC class I epitope 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 amino acids in length. For each X, each N can also encodes a MHC class I epitope at least 5, at least 6, at least 7, at least 8, at least 9, at least 10, at least 11, at least 12, at least 13, at least 14, at least 15, at least 16, at least 17, at least 18, at least 19, at least 20, at least 21, at least 22, at least 23, at least 24, at least 25, at least 26, at least 27, at least 28, at least 29, or at least 30 amino acids in length.
V.B. Immune Checkpoints
Vectors described herein, such as C68 vectors described herein or alphavirus vectors described herein, can comprise a nucleic acid which encodes at least one neoantigen and the same or a separate vector can comprise a nucleic acid which encodes at least one immune modulator (e.g., an antibody such as an scFv) which binds to and blocks the activity of an immune checkpoint molecule. Vectors can comprise a neoantigen cassette and one or more nucleic acid molecules encoding a checkpoint inhibitor.
Illustrative immune checkpoint molecules that can be targeted for blocking or inhibition include, but are not limited to, CTLA-4, 4-1BB (CD137), 4-1BBL (CD137L), PDL1, PDL2, PD1, B7-H3, B7-H4, BTLA, HVEM, TIM3, GAL9, LAG3, TIM3, B7H3, B7H4, VISTA, KIR, 2B4 (belongs to the CD2 family of molecules and is expressed on all NK, γδ, and memory CD8+ (αβ) T cells), CD160 (also referred to as BY55), and CGEN-15049. Immune checkpoint inhibitors include antibodies, or antigen binding fragments thereof, or other binding proteins, that bind to and block or inhibit the activity of one or more of CTLA-4, PDL1, PDL2, PD1, B7-H3, B7-H4, BTLA, HVEM, TIM3, GAL9, LAG3, TIM3, B7H3, B7H4, VISTA, KIR, 2B4, CD160, and CGEN-15049. Illustrative immune checkpoint inhibitors include Tremelimumab (CTLA-4 blocking antibody), anti-OX40, PD-L1 monoclonal Antibody (Anti-B7-H1; MEDI4736), ipilimumab, MK-3475 (PD-1 blocker), Nivolumamb (anti-PD1 antibody), CT-011 (anti-PD1 antibody), BY55 monoclonal antibody, AMP224 (anti-PDL1 antibody), BMS-936559 (anti-PDL1 antibody), MPLDL3280A (anti-PDL1 antibody), MSB0010718C (anti-PDL1 antibody) and Yervoy/ipilimumab (anti-CTLA-4 checkpoint inhibitor). Antibody-encoding sequences can be engineered into vectors such as C68 using ordinary skill in the art. An exemplary method is described in Fang et al., Stable antibody expression at therapeutic levels using the 2A peptide. Nat Biotechnol. 2005 May; 23(5):584-90. Epub 2005 Apr. 17; herein incorporated by reference for all purposes.
V.C. Additional Considerations for Vaccine Design and Manufacture
V.C.1. Determination of a Set of Peptides that Cover all Tumor Subclones
Truncal peptides, meaning those presented by all or most tumor subclones, can be prioritized for inclusion into the vaccine.53 Optionally, if there are no truncal peptides predicted to be presented and immunogenic with high probability, or if the number of truncal peptides predicted to be presented and immunogenic with high probability is small enough that additional non-truncal peptides can be included in the vaccine, then further peptides can be prioritized by estimating the number and identity of tumor subclones and choosing peptides so as to maximize the number of tumor subclones covered by the vaccine.54
V.C.2. Neoantigen Prioritization
After all of the above above neoantigen filters are applied, more candidate neoantigens may still be available for vaccine inclusion than the vaccine technology can support. Additionally, uncertainty about various aspects of the neoantigen analysis may remain and tradeoffs may exist between different properties of candidate vaccine neoantigens. Thus, in place of predetermined filters at each step of the selection process, an integrated multi-dimensional model can be considered that places candidate neoantigens in a space with at least the following axes and optimizes selection using an integrative approach.
Additionally, optionally, neoantigens can be deprioritized (e.g., excluded) from the vaccination if they are predicted to be presented by HLA alleles lost or inactivated in either all or part of the patient's tumor. HLA allele loss can occur by either somatic mutation, loss of heterozygosity, or homozygous deletion of the locus. Methods for detection of HLA allele somatic mutation are well known in the art, e.g. (Shukla et al., 2015). Methods for detection of somatic LOH and homozygous deletion (including for HLA locus) are likewise well described. (Carter et al., 2012; McGranahan et al., 2017; Van Loo et al., 2010).
V.D. Alphavirus
V.D.1. Alphavirus Biology
Alphaviruses are members of the family Togaviridae, and are positive-sense single stranded RNA viruses. Alphaviruses can also be referred to as self-replicating RNA or srRNA. Members are typically classified as either Old World, such as Sindbis, Ross River, Mayaro, Chikungunya, and Semliki Forest viruses, or New World, such as eastern equine encephalitis, Aura, Fort Morgan, or Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus and its derivative strain TC-83 (Strauss Microbrial Review 1994). A natural alphavirus genome is typically around 12 kb in length, the first two-thirds of which contain genes encoding non-structural proteins (nsPs) that form RNA replication complexes for self-replication of the viral genome, and the last third of which contains a subgenomic expression cassette encoding structural proteins for virion production (Frolov RNA 2001).
A model lifecycle of an alphavirus involves several distinct steps (Strauss Microbrial Review 1994, Jose Future Microbiol 2009). Following virus attachment to a host cell, the virion fuses with membranes within endocytic compartments resulting in the eventual release of genomic RNA into the cytosol. The genomic RNA, which is in a plus-strand orientation and comprises a 5′ methylguanylate cap and 3′ polyA tail, is translated to produce non-structural proteins nsP1-4 that form the replication complex. Early in infection, the plus-strand is then replicated by the complex into a minus-stand template. In the current model, the replication complex is further processed as infection progresses, with the resulting processed complex switching to transcription of the minus-strand into both full-length positive-strand genomic RNA, as well as the 26S subgenomic positive-strand RNA containing the structural genes. Several conserved sequence elements (CSEs) of alphavirus have been identified to potentially play a role in the various RNA replication steps including; a complement of the 5′ UTR in the replication of plus-strand RNAs from a minus-strand template, a 51-nt CSE in the replication of minus-strand synthesis from the genomic template, a 24-nt CSE in the junction region between the nsPs and the 26S RNA in the transcription of the subgenomic RNA from the minus-strand, and a 3′ 19-nt CSE in minus-strand synthesis from the plus-strand template.
Following the replication of the various RNA species, virus particles are then typically assembled in the natural lifecycle of the virus. The 26S RNA is translated and the resulting proteins further processed to produce the structural proteins including capsid protein, glycoproteins E1 and E2, and two small polypeptides E3 and 6K (Strauss 1994). Encapsidation of viral RNA occurs, with capsid proteins normally specific for only genomic RNA being packaged, followed by virion assembly and budding at the membrane surface.
V.D.2. Alphavirus as a Delivery Vector
Alphaviruses have previously been engineered for use as expression vector systems (Pushko 1997, Rheme 2004). Alphaviruses offer several advantages, particularly in a vaccine setting where heterologous antigen expression can be desired. Due to its ability to self-replicate in the host cytosol, alphavirus vectors are generally able to produce high copy numbers of the expression cassette within a cell resulting in a high level of heterologous antigen production. Additionally, the vectors are generally transient, resulting in improved biosafety as well as reduced induction of immunological tolerance to the vector. The public, in general, also lacks pre-existing immunity to alphavirus vectors as compared to other standard viral vectors, such as human adenovirus. Alphavirus based vectors also generally result in cytotoxic responses to infected cells. Cytotoxicity, to a certain degree, can be important in a vaccine setting to properly illicit an immune response to the heterologous antigen expressed. However, the degree of desired cytotoxicity can be a balancing act, and thus several attenuated alphaviruses have been developed, including the TC-83 strain of VEE. Thus, an example of a neoantigen expression vector described herein can utilize an alphavirus backbone that allows for a high level of neoantigen expression, elicits a robust immune response to neoantigen, does not elicit an immune response to the vector itself, and can be used in a safe manner. Furthermore, the neoantigen expression cassette can be designed to elicit different levels of an immune response through optimization of which alphavirus sequences the vector uses, including, but not limited to, sequences derived from VEE or its attenuated derivative TC-83.
Several expression vector design strategies have been engineered using alphavirus sequences (Pushko 1997). In one strategy, a alphavirus vector design includes inserting a second copy of the 26S promoter sequence elements downstream of the structural protein genes, followed by a heterologous gene (Frolov 1993). Thus, in addition to the natural non-structural and structural proteins, an additional subgenomic RNA is produced that expresses the heterologous protein. In this system, all the elements for production of infectious virions are present and, therefore, repeated rounds of infection of the expression vector in non-infected cells can occur.
Another expression vector design makes use of helper virus systems (Pushko 1997). In this strategy, the structural proteins are replaced by a heterologous gene. Thus, following self-replication of viral RNA mediated by still intact non-structural genes, the 26S subgenomic RNA provides for expression of the heterologous protein. Traditionally, additional vectors that expresses the structural proteins are then supplied in trans, such as by co-transfection of a cell line, to produce infectious virus. A system is described in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 8,093,021, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety, for all purposes. The helper vector system provides the benefit of limiting the possibility of forming infectious particles and, therefore, improves biosafety. In addition, the helper vector system reduces the total vector length, potentially improving the replication and expression efficiency. Thus, an example of a neoantigen expression vector described herein can utilize an alphavirus backbone wherein the structural proteins are replaced by a neoantigen cassette, the resulting vector both reducing biosafety concerns, while at the same time promoting efficient expression due to the reduction in overall expression vector size.
V.D.3. Alphavirus Production In Vitro
Alphavirus delivery vectors are generally positive-sense RNA polynucleotides. A convenient technique well-known in the art for RNA production is in vitro transcription IVT. In this technique, a DNA template of the desired vector is first produced by techniques well-known to those in the art, including standard molecular biology techniques such as cloning, restriction digestion, ligation, gene synthesis, and polymerase chain reaction (PCR). The DNA template contains a RNA polymerase promoter at the 5′ end of the sequence desired to be transcribed into RNA. Promoters include, but are not limited to, bacteriophage polymerase promoters such as T3, T7, or SP6. The DNA template is then incubated with the appropriate RNA polymerase enzyme, buffer agents, and nucleotides (NTPs). The resulting RNA polynucleotide can optionally be further modified including, but limited to, addition of a 5′ cap structure such as 7-methylguanosine or a related structure, and optionally modifying the 3′ end to include a polyadenylate (polyA) tail. The RNA can then be purified using techniques well-known in the field, such as phenol-chloroform extraction.
V.D.4. Delivery Via Lipid Nanoparticle
An important aspect to consider in vaccine vector design is immunity against the vector itself (Riley 2017). This may be in the form of preexisting immunity to the vector itself, such as with certain human adenovirus systems, or in the form of developing immunity to the vector following administration of the vaccine. The latter is an important consideration if multiple administrations of the same vaccine are performed, such as separate priming and boosting doses, or if the same vaccine vector system is to be used to deliver different neoantigen cassettes.
In the case of alphavirus vectors, the standard delivery method is the previously discussed helper virus system that provides capsid, E1, and E2 proteins in trans to produce infectious viral particles. However, it is important to note that the E1 and E2 proteins are often major targets of neutralizing antibodies (Strauss 1994). Thus, the efficacy of using alphavirus vectors to deliver neoantigens of interest to target cells may be reduced if infectious particles are targeted by neutralizing antibodies.
An alternative to viral particle mediated gene delivery is the use of nanomaterials to deliver expression vectors (Riley 2017). Nanomaterial vehicles, importantly, can be made of non-immunogenic materials and generally avoid eliciting immunity to the delivery vector itself. These materials can include, but are not limited to, lipids, inorganic nanomaterials, and other polymeric materials. Lipids can be cationic, anionic, or neutral. The materials can be synthetic or naturally derived, and in some instances biodegradable. Lipids can include fats, cholesterol, phospholipids, lipid conjugates including, but not limited to, polyethyleneglycol (PEG) conjugates (PEGylated lipids), waxes, oils, glycerides, and fat soulable vitamins.
Lipid nanoparticles (LNPs) are an attractive delivery system due to the amphiphilic nature of lipids enabling formation of membranes and vesicle like structures (Riley 2017). In general, these vesicles deliver the expression vector by absorbing into the membrane of target cells and releasing nucleic acid into the cytosol. In addition, LNPs can be further modified or functionalized to facilitate targeting of specific cell types. Another consideration in LNP design is the balance between targeting efficiency and cytotoxicity. Lipid compositions generally include defined mixtures of cationic, neutral, anionic, and amphipathic lipids. In some instances, specific lipids are included to prevent LNP aggregation, prevent lipid oxidation, or provide functional chemical groups that facilitate attachment of additional moieties. Lipid composition can influence overall LNP size and stability. In an example, the lipid composition comprises dilinoleylmethyl-4-dimethylaminobutyrate (MC3) or MC3-like molecules. MC3 and MC3-like lipid compositions can be formulated to include one or more other lipids, such as a PEG or PEG-conjugated lipid, a sterol, or neutral lipids.
Nucleic-acid vectors, such as expression vectors, exposed directly to serum can have several undesirable consequences, including degradation of the nucleic acid by serum nucleases or off-target stimulation of the immune system by the free nucleic acids. Therefore, encapsulation of the alphavirus vector can be used to avoid degradation, while also avoiding potential off-target affects. In certain examples, an alphavirus vector is fully encapsulated within the delivery vehicle, such as within the aqueous interior of an LNP. Encapsulation of the alphavirus vector within an LNP can be carried out by techniques well-known to those skilled in the art, such as microfluidic mixing and droplet generation carried out on a microfluidic droplet generating device. Such devices include, but are not limited to, standard T-junction devices or flow-focusing devices. In an example, the desired lipid formulation, such as MC3 or MC3-like containing compositions, is provided to the droplet generating device in parallel with the alphavirus delivery vector and other desired agents, such that the delivery vector and desired agents are fully encapsulated within the interior of the MC3 or MC3-like based LNP. In an example, the droplet generating device can control the size range and size distribution of the LNPs produced. For example, the LNP can have a size ranging from 1 to 1000 nanometers in diameter, e.g., 1, 10, 50, 100, 500, or 1000 nanometers. Following droplet generation, the delivery vehicles encapsulating the expression vectors can be further treated or modified to prepare them for administration.
V.E. Chimpanzee Adenovirus (ChAd)
V.E.1. Viral Delivery with Chimpanzee Adenovirus
Vaccine compositions for delivery of one or more neoantigens (e.g., via a neoantigen cassette) can be created by providing adenovirus nucleotide sequences of chimpanzee origin, a variety of novel vectors, and cell lines expressing chimpanzee adenovirus genes. A nucleotide sequence of a chimpanzee C68 adenovirus (also referred to herein as ChAdV68) can be used in a vaccine composition for neoantigen delivery (See SEQ ID NO: 1). Use of C68 adenovirus derived vectors is described in further detail in U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,716, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety, for all purposes.
In a further aspect, provided herein is a recombinant adenovirus comprising the DNA sequence of a chimpanzee adenovirus such as C68 and a neoantigen cassette operatively linked to regulatory sequences directing its expression. The recombinant virus is capable of infecting a mammalian, preferably a human, cell and capable of expressing the neoantigen cassette product in the cell. In this vector, the native chimpanzee E1 gene, and/or E3 gene, and/or E4 gene can be deleted. A neoantigen cassette can be inserted into any of these sites of gene deletion. The neoantigen cassette can include a neoantigen against which a primed immune response is desired.
In another aspect, provided herein is a mammalian cell infected with a chimpanzee adenovirus such as C68.
In still a further aspect, a novel mammalian cell line is provided which expresses a chimpanzee adenovirus gene (e.g., from C68) or functional fragment thereof.
In still a further aspect, provided herein is a method for delivering a neoantigen cassette into a mammalian cell comprising the step of introducing into the cell an effective amount of a chimpanzee adenovirus, such as C68, that has been engineered to express the neoantigen cassette.
Still another aspect provides a method for eliciting an immune response in a mammalian host to treat cancer. The method can comprise the step of administering to the host an effective amount of a recombinant chimpanzee adenovirus, such as C68, comprising a neoantigen cassette that encodes one or more neoantigens from the tumor against which the immune response is targeted.
Also disclosed is a non-simian mammalian cell that expresses a chimpanzee adenovirus gene obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1. The gene can be selected from the group consisting of the adenovirus E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4 and L5 of SEQ ID NO: 1.
Also disclosed is a nucleic acid molecule comprising a chimpanzee adenovirus DNA sequence comprising a gene obtained from the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1. The gene can be selected from the group consisting of said chimpanzee adenovirus E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4 and L5 genes of SEQ ID NO: 1. In some aspects the nucleic acid molecule comprises SEQ ID NO: 1. In some aspects the nucleic acid molecule comprises the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, lacking at least one gene selected from the group consisting of E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4 and L5 genes of SEQ ID NO: 1.
Also disclosed is a vector comprising a chimpanzee adenovirus DNA sequence obtained from SEQ ID NO: 1 and a neoantigen cassette operatively linked to one or more regulatory sequences which direct expression of the cassette in a heterologous host cell, optionally wherein the chimpanzee adenovirus DNA sequence comprises at least the cis-elements necessary for replication and virion encapsidation, the cis-elements flanking the neoantigen cassette and regulatory sequences. In some aspects, the chimpanzee adenovirus DNA sequence comprises a gene selected from the group consisting of E1A, E1B, E2A, E2B, E3, E4, L1, L2, L3, L4 and L5 gene sequences of SEQ ID NO: 1. In some aspects the vector can lack the E1A and/or E1B gene.
Also disclosed herein is a host cell transfected with a vector disclosed herein such as a C68 vector engineered to expression a neoantigen cassette. Also disclosed herein is a human cell that expresses a selected gene introduced therein through introduction of a vector disclosed herein into the cell.
Also disclosed herein is a method for delivering a neoantigen cassette to a mammalian cell comprising introducing into said cell an effective amount of a vector disclosed herein such as a C68 vector engineered to expression the neoantigen cassette.
Also disclosed herein is a method for producing a neoantigen comprising introducing a vector disclosed herein into a mammalian cell, culturing the cell under suitable conditions and producing the neoantigen.
V.E.2. E1-Expressing Complementation Cell Lines
To generate recombinant chimpanzee adenoviruses (Ad) deleted in any of the genes described herein, the function of the deleted gene region, if essential to the replication and infectivity of the virus, can be supplied to the recombinant virus by a helper virus or cell line, i.e., a complementation or packaging cell line. For example, to generate a replication-defective chimpanzee adenovirus vector, a cell line can be used which expresses the E1 gene products of the human or chimpanzee adenovirus; such a cell line can include HEK293 or variants thereof. The protocol for the generation of the cell lines expressing the chimpanzee E1 gene products (Examples 3 and 4 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,716) can be followed to generate a cell line which expresses any selected chimpanzee adenovirus gene.
An AAV augmentation assay can be used to identify a chimpanzee adenovirus E1-expressing cell line. This assay is useful to identify E1 function in cell lines made by using the E1 genes of other uncharacterized adenoviruses, e.g., from other species. That assay is described in Example 4B of U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,716.
A selected chimpanzee adenovirus gene, e.g., E1, can be under the transcriptional control of a promoter for expression in a selected parent cell line. Inducible or constitutive promoters can be employed for this purpose. Among inducible promoters are included the sheep metallothionine promoter, inducible by zinc, or the mouse mammary tumor virus (MMTV) promoter, inducible by a glucocorticoid, particularly, dexamethasone. Other inducible promoters, such as those identified in International patent application WO95/13392, incorporated by reference herein can also be used in the production of packaging cell lines. Constitutive promoters in control of the expression of the chimpanzee adenovirus gene can be employed also.
A parent cell can be selected for the generation of a novel cell line expressing any desired C68 gene. Without limitation, such a parent cell line can be HeLa [ATCC Accession No. CCL 2], A549 [ATCC Accession No. CCL 185], KB [CCL 17], Detroit [e.g., Detroit 510, CCL 72] and WI-38 [CCL 75] cells. Other suitable parent cell lines can be obtained from other sources. Parent cell lines can include CHO, HEK293 or variants thereof, 911, HeLa, A549, LP-293, PER.C6, or AE1-2a.
An E1-expressing cell line can be useful in the generation of recombinant chimpanzee adenovirus E1 deleted vectors. Cell lines constructed using essentially the same procedures that express one or more other chimpanzee adenoviral gene products are useful in the generation of recombinant chimpanzee adenovirus vectors deleted in the genes that encode those products. Further, cell lines which express other human Ad E1 gene products are also useful in generating chimpanzee recombinant Ads.
V.E.3. Recombinant Viral Particles as Vectors
The compositions disclosed herein can comprise viral vectors, that deliver at least one neoantigen to cells. Such vectors comprise a chimpanzee adenovirus DNA sequence such as C68 and a neoantigen cassette operatively linked to regulatory sequences which direct expression of the cassette. The C68 vector is capable of expressing the cassette in an infected mammalian cell. The C68 vector can be functionally deleted in one or more viral genes. A neoantigen cassette comprises at least one neoantigen under the control of one or more regulatory sequences such as a promoter. Optional helper viruses and/or packaging cell lines can supply to the chimpanzee viral vector any necessary products of deleted adenoviral genes.
The term “functionally deleted” means that a sufficient amount of the gene region is removed or otherwise altered, e.g., by mutation or modification, so that the gene region is no longer capable of producing one or more functional products of gene expression. Mutations or modifications that can result in functional deletions include, but are not limited to, nonsense mutations such as introduction of premature stop codons and removal of canonical and non-canonical start codons, mutations that alter mRNA splicing or other transcriptional processing, or combinations thereof. If desired, the entire gene region can be removed.
Modifications of the nucleic acid sequences forming the vectors disclosed herein, including sequence deletions, insertions, and other mutations may be generated using standard molecular biological techniques and are within the scope of this invention.
V.E.4. Construction of The Viral Plasmid Vector
The chimpanzee adenovirus C68 vectors useful in this invention include recombinant, defective adenoviruses, that is, chimpanzee adenovirus sequences functionally deleted in the E1a or E1b genes, and optionally bearing other mutations, e.g., temperature-sensitive mutations or deletions in other genes. It is anticipated that these chimpanzee sequences are also useful in forming hybrid vectors from other adenovirus and/or adeno-associated virus sequences. Homologous adenovirus vectors prepared from human adenoviruses are described in the published literature [see, for example, Kozarsky I and II, cited above, and references cited therein, U.S. Pat. No. 5,240,846].
In the construction of useful chimpanzee adenovirus C68 vectors for delivery of a neoantigen cassette to a human (or other mammalian) cell, a range of adenovirus nucleic acid sequences can be employed in the vectors. A vector comprising minimal chimpanzee C68 adenovirus sequences can be used in conjunction with a helper virus to produce an infectious recombinant virus particle. The helper virus provides essential gene products required for viral infectivity and propagation of the minimal chimpanzee adenoviral vector. When only one or more selected deletions of chimpanzee adenovirus genes are made in an otherwise functional viral vector, the deleted gene products can be supplied in the viral vector production process by propagating the virus in a selected packaging cell line that provides the deleted gene functions in trans.
V.E.5. Recombinant Minimal Adenovirus
A minimal chimpanzee Ad C68 virus is a viral particle containing just the adenovirus cis-elements necessary for replication and virion encapsidation. That is, the vector contains the cis-acting 5′ and 3′ inverted terminal repeat (ITR) sequences of the adenoviruses (which function as origins of replication) and the native 5′ packaging/enhancer domains (that contain sequences necessary for packaging linear Ad genomes and enhancer elements for the E1 promoter). See, for example, the techniques described for preparation of a “minimal” human Ad vector in International Patent Application WO96/13597 and incorporated herein by reference.
V.E.6. Other Defective Adenoviruses
Recombinant, replication-deficient adenoviruses can also contain more than the minimal chimpanzee adenovirus sequences. These other Ad vectors can be characterized by deletions of various portions of gene regions of the virus, and infectious virus particles formed by the optional use of helper viruses and/or packaging cell lines.
As one example, suitable vectors may be formed by deleting all or a sufficient portion of the C68 adenoviral immediate early gene Ela and delayed early gene E1b, so as to eliminate their normal biological functions. Replication-defective E1-deleted viruses are capable of replicating and producing infectious virus when grown on a chimpanzee adenovirus-transformed, complementation cell line containing functional adenovirus E1a and E1b genes which provide the corresponding gene products in trans. Based on the homologies to known adenovirus sequences, it is anticipated that, as is true for the human recombinant E1-deleted adenoviruses of the art, the resulting recombinant chimpanzee adenovirus is capable of infecting many cell types and can express neoantigen(s), but cannot replicate in most cells that do not carry the chimpanzee E1 region DNA unless the cell is infected at a very high multiplicity of infection.
As another example, all or a portion of the C68 adenovirus delayed early gene E3 can be eliminated from the chimpanzee adenovirus sequence which forms a part of the recombinant virus.
Chimpanzee adenovirus C68 vectors can also be constructed having a deletion of the E4 gene. Still another vector can contain a deletion in the delayed early gene E2a.
Deletions can also be made in any of the late genes L1 through L5 of the chimpanzee C68 adenovirus genome. Similarly, deletions in the intermediate genes IX and IVa2 can be useful for some purposes. Other deletions may be made in the other structural or non-structural adenovirus genes.
The above discussed deletions can be used individually, i.e., an adenovirus sequence can contain deletions of E1 only. Alternatively, deletions of entire genes or portions thereof effective to destroy or reduce their biological activity can be used in any combination. For example, in one exemplary vector, the adenovirus C68 sequence can have deletions of the E1 genes and the E4 gene, or of the E1, E2a and E3 genes, or of the E1 and E3 genes, or of E1, E2a and E4 genes, with or without deletion of E3, and so on. As discussed above, such deletions can be used in combination with other mutations, such as temperature-sensitive mutations, to achieve a desired result.
The cassette comprising neoantigen(s) be inserted optionally into any deleted region of the chimpanzee C68 Ad virus. Alternatively, the cassette can be inserted into an existing gene region to disrupt the function of that region, if desired.
V.E.7. Helper Viruses
Depending upon the chimpanzee adenovirus gene content of the viral vectors employed to carry the neoantigen cassette, a helper adenovirus or non-replicating virus fragment can be used to provide sufficient chimpanzee adenovirus gene sequences to produce an infective recombinant viral particle containing the cassette.
Useful helper viruses contain selected adenovirus gene sequences not present in the adenovirus vector construct and/or not expressed by the packaging cell line in which the vector is transfected. A helper virus can be replication-defective and contain a variety of adenovirus genes in addition to the sequences described above. The helper virus can be used in combination with the E1-expressing cell lines described herein.
For C68, the “helper” virus can be a fragment formed by clipping the C terminal end of the C68 genome with SspI, which removes about 1300 bp from the left end of the virus. This clipped virus is then co-transfected into an E1-expressing cell line with the plasmid DNA, thereby forming the recombinant virus by homologous recombination with the C68 sequences in the plasmid.
Helper viruses can also be formed into poly-cation conjugates as described in Wu et al, J. Biol. Chem., 264:16985-16987 (1989); K. J. Fisher and J. M. Wilson, Biochem. J., 299:49 (Apr. 1, 1994). Helper virus can optionally contain a reporter gene. A number of such reporter genes are known to the art. The presence of a reporter gene on the helper virus which is different from the neoantigen cassette on the adenovirus vector allows both the Ad vector and the helper virus to be independently monitored. This second reporter is used to enable separation between the resulting recombinant virus and the helper virus upon purification.
V.E.8. Assembly of Viral Particle and Infection of a Cell Line
Assembly of the selected DNA sequences of the adenovirus, the neoantigen cassette, and other vector elements into various intermediate plasmids and shuttle vectors, and the use of the plasmids and vectors to produce a recombinant viral particle can all be achieved using conventional techniques. Such techniques include conventional cloning techniques of cDNA, in vitro recombination techniques (e.g., Gibson assembly), use of overlapping oligonucleotide sequences of the adenovirus genomes, polymerase chain reaction, and any suitable method which provides the desired nucleotide sequence. Standard transfection and co-transfection techniques are employed, e.g., CaPO4 precipitation techniques or liposome-mediated transfection methods such as lipofectamine. Other conventional methods employed include homologous recombination of the viral genomes, plaquing of viruses in agar overlay, methods of measuring signal generation, and the like.
For example, following the construction and assembly of the desired neoantigen cassette-containing viral vector, the vector can be transfected in vitro in the presence of a helper virus into the packaging cell line. Homologous recombination occurs between the helper and the vector sequences, which permits the adenovirus-neoantigen sequences in the vector to be replicated and packaged into virion capsids, resulting in the recombinant viral vector particles.
The resulting recombinant chimpanzee C68 adenoviruses are useful in transferring a neoantigen cassette to a selected cell. In in vivo experiments with the recombinant virus grown in the packaging cell lines, the E1-deleted recombinant chimpanzee adenovirus demonstrates utility in transferring a cassette to a non-chimpanzee, preferably a human, cell.
V.E.9. Use of the Recombinant Virus Vectors
The resulting recombinant chimpanzee C68 adenovirus containing the neoantigen cassette (produced by cooperation of the adenovirus vector and helper virus or adenoviral vector and packaging cell line, as described above) thus provides an efficient gene transfer vehicle which can deliver neoantigen(s) to a subject in vivo or ex vivo.
The above-described recombinant vectors are administered to humans according to published methods for gene therapy. A chimpanzee viral vector bearing a neoantigen cassette can be administered to a patient, preferably suspended in a biologically compatible solution or pharmaceutically acceptable delivery vehicle. A suitable vehicle includes sterile saline. Other aqueous and non-aqueous isotonic sterile injection solutions and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions known to be pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and well known to those of skill in the art may be employed for this purpose.
The chimpanzee adenoviral vectors are administered in sufficient amounts to transduce the human cells and to provide sufficient levels of neoantigen transfer and expression to provide a therapeutic benefit without undue adverse or with medically acceptable physiological effects, which can be determined by those skilled in the medical arts. Conventional and pharmaceutically acceptable routes of administration include, but are not limited to, direct delivery to the liver, intranasal, intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, intradermal, oral and other parental routes of administration. Routes of administration may be combined, if desired.
Dosages of the viral vector will depend primarily on factors such as the condition being treated, the age, weight and health of the patient, and may thus vary among patients. The dosage will be adjusted to balance the therapeutic benefit against any side effects and such dosages may vary depending upon the therapeutic application for which the recombinant vector is employed. The levels of expression of neoantigen(s) can be monitored to determine the frequency of dosage administration.
Recombinant, replication defective adenoviruses can be administered in a “pharmaceutically effective amount”, that is, an amount of recombinant adenovirus that is effective in a route of administration to transfect the desired cells and provide sufficient levels of expression of the selected gene to provide a vaccinal benefit, i.e., some measurable level of protective immunity. C68 vectors comprising a neoantigen cassette can be co-administered with adjuvant. Adjuvant can be separate from the vector (e.g., alum) or encoded within the vector, in particular if the adjuvant is a protein. Adjuvants are well known in the art.
Conventional and pharmaceutically acceptable routes of administration include, but are not limited to, intranasal, intramuscular, intratracheal, subcutaneous, intradermal, rectal, oral and other parental routes of administration. Routes of administration may be combined, if desired, or adjusted depending upon the immunogen or the disease. For example, in prophylaxis of rabies, the subcutaneous, intratracheal and intranasal routes are preferred. The route of administration primarily will depend on the nature of the disease being treated.
The levels of immunity to neoantigen(s) can be monitored to determine the need, if any, for boosters. Following an assessment of antibody titers in the serum, for example, optional booster immunizations may be desired
Also provided is a method of inducing a tumor specific immune response in a subject, vaccinating against a tumor, treating and or alleviating a symptom of cancer in a subject by administering to the subject one or more neoantigens such as a plurality of neoantigens identified using methods disclosed herein.
In some aspects, a subject has been diagnosed with cancer or is at risk of developing cancer. A subject can be a human, dog, cat, horse or any animal in which a tumor specific immune response is desired. A tumor can be any solid tumor such as breast, ovarian, prostate, lung, kidney, gastric, colon, testicular, head and neck, pancreas, brain, melanoma, and other tumors of tissue organs and hematological tumors, such as lymphomas and leukemias, including acute myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, T cell lymphocytic leukemia, and B cell lymphomas.
A neoantigen can be administered in an amount sufficient to induce a CTL response.
A neoantigen can be administered alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents. The therapeutic agent is for example, a chemotherapeutic agent, radiation, or immunotherapy. Any suitable therapeutic treatment for a particular cancer can be administered.
In addition, a subject can be further administered an anti-immunosuppressive/immunostimulatory agent such as a checkpoint inhibitor. For example, the subject can be further administered an anti-CTLA antibody or anti-PD-1 or anti-PD-L1. Blockade of CTLA-4 or PD-L1 by antibodies can enhance the immune response to cancerous cells in the patient. In particular, CTLA-4 blockade has been shown effective when following a vaccination protocol.
The optimum amount of each neoantigen to be included in a vaccine composition and the optimum dosing regimen can be determined. For example, a neoantigen or its variant can be prepared for intravenous (i.v.) injection, sub-cutaneous (s.c.) injection, intradermal (i.d.) injection, intraperitoneal (i.p.) injection, intramuscular (i.m.) injection. Methods of injection include s.c., i.d., i.p., i.m., and i.v. Methods of DNA or RNA injection include i.d., i.m., s.c., i.p. and i.v. Other methods of administration of the vaccine composition are known to those skilled in the art.
A vaccine can be compiled so that the selection, number and/or amount of neoantigens present in the composition is/are tissue, cancer, and/or patient-specific. For instance, the exact selection of peptides can be guided by expression patterns of the parent proteins in a given tissue. The selection can be dependent on the specific type of cancer, the status of the disease, earlier treatment regimens, the immune status of the patient, and, of course, the HLA-haplotype of the patient. Furthermore, a vaccine can contain individualized components, according to personal needs of the particular patient. Examples include varying the selection of neoantigens according to the expression of the neoantigen in the particular patient or adjustments for secondary treatments following a first round or scheme of treatment.
For a composition to be used as a vaccine for cancer, neoantigens with similar normal self-peptides that are expressed in high amounts in normal tissues can be avoided or be present in low amounts in a composition described herein. On the other hand, if it is known that the tumor of a patient expresses high amounts of a certain neoantigen, the respective pharmaceutical composition for treatment of this cancer can be present in high amounts and/or more than one neoantigen specific for this particularly neoantigen or pathway of this neoantigen can be included.
Compositions comprising a neoantigen can be administered to an individual already suffering from cancer. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient in an amount sufficient to elicit an effective CTL response to the tumor antigen and to cure or at least partially arrest symptoms and/or complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as “therapeutically effective dose.” Amounts effective for this use will depend on, e.g., the composition, the manner of administration, the stage and severity of the disease being treated, the weight and general state of health of the patient, and the judgment of the prescribing physician. It should be kept in mind that compositions can generally be employed in serious disease states, that is, life-threatening or potentially life threatening situations, especially when the cancer has metastasized. In such cases, in view of the minimization of extraneous substances and the relative nontoxic nature of a neoantigen, it is possible and can be felt desirable by the treating physician to administer substantial excesses of these compositions.
For therapeutic use, administration can begin at the detection or surgical removal of tumors. This is followed by boosting doses until at least symptoms are substantially abated and for a period thereafter.
The pharmaceutical compositions (e.g., vaccine compositions) for therapeutic treatment are intended for parenteral, topical, nasal, oral or local administration. A pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally, e.g., intravenously, subcutaneously, intradermally, or intramuscularly. The compositions can be administered at the site of surgical exiscion to induce a local immune response to the tumor. Disclosed herein are compositions for parenteral administration which comprise a solution of the neoantigen and vaccine compositions are dissolved or suspended in an acceptable carrier, e.g., an aqueous carrier. A variety of aqueous carriers can be used, e.g., water, buffered water, 0.9% saline, 0.3% glycine, hyaluronic acid and the like. These compositions can be sterilized by conventional, well known sterilization techniques, or can be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions can be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile solution prior to administration. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions, such as pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents and the like, for example, sodium acetate, sodium lactate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, etc.
Neoantigens can also be administered via liposomes, which target them to a particular cells tissue, such as lymphoid tissue. Liposomes are also useful in increasing half-life. Liposomes include emulsions, foams, micelles, insoluble monolayers, liquid crystals, phospholipid dispersions, lamellar layers and the like. In these preparations the neoantigen to be delivered is incorporated as part of a liposome, alone or in conjunction with a molecule which binds to, e.g., a receptor prevalent among lymphoid cells, such as monoclonal antibodies which bind to the CD45 antigen, or with other therapeutic or immunogenic compositions. Thus, liposomes filled with a desired neoantigen can be directed to the site of lymphoid cells, where the liposomes then deliver the selected therapeutic/immunogenic compositions. Liposomes can be formed from standard vesicle-forming lipids, which generally include neutral and negatively charged phospholipids and a sterol, such as cholesterol. The selection of lipids is generally guided by consideration of, e.g., liposome size, acid lability and stability of the liposomes in the blood stream. A variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka et al., Ann. Rev. Biophys. Bioeng. 9; 467 (1980), U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,235,871, 4,501,728, 4,501,728, 4,837,028, and 5,019,369.
For targeting to the immune cells, a ligand to be incorporated into the liposome can include, e.g., antibodies or fragments thereof specific for cell surface determinants of the desired immune system cells. A liposome suspension can be administered intravenously, locally, topically, etc. in a dose which varies according to, inter alia, the manner of administration, the peptide being delivered, and the stage of the disease being treated.
For therapeutic or immunization purposes, nucleic acids encoding a peptide and optionally one or more of the peptides described herein can also be administered to the patient. A number of methods are conveniently used to deliver the nucleic acids to the patient. For instance, the nucleic acid can be delivered directly, as “naked DNA”. This approach is described, for instance, in Wolff et al., Science 247: 1465-1468 (1990) as well as U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,580,859 and 5,589,466. The nucleic acids can also be administered using ballistic delivery as described, for instance, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,204,253. Particles comprised solely of DNA can be administered. Alternatively, DNA can be adhered to particles, such as gold particles. Approaches for delivering nucleic acid sequences can include viral vectors, mRNA vectors, and DNA vectors with or without electroporation.
The nucleic acids can also be delivered complexed to cationic compounds, such as cationic lipids. Lipid-mediated gene delivery methods are described, for instance, in 9618372WOAWO 96/18372; 9324640WOAWO 93/24640; Mannino & Gould-Fogerite, BioTechniques 6(7): 682-691 (1988); U.S. Pat. No. 5,279,833 Rose U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,279,833; 9106309WOAWO 91/06309; and Felgner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84: 7413-7414 (1987).
Neoantigens can also be included in viral vector-based vaccine platforms, such as vaccinia, fowlpox, self-replicating alphavirus, marabavirus, adenovirus (See, e.g., Tatsis et al., Adenoviruses, Molecular Therapy (2004) 10, 616-629), or lentivirus, including but not limited to second, third or hybrid second/third generation lentivirus and recombinant lentivirus of any generation designed to target specific cell types or receptors (See, e.g., Hu et al., Immunization Delivered by Lentiviral Vectors for Cancer and Infectious Diseases, Immunol Rev. (2011) 239(1): 45-61, Sakuma et al., Lentiviral vectors: basic to translational, Biochem J. (2012) 443(3):603-18, Cooper et al., Rescue of splicing-mediated intron loss maximizes expression in lentiviral vectors containing the human ubiquitin C promoter, Nucl. Acids Res. (2015) 43 (1): 682-690, Zufferey et al., Self-Inactivating Lentivirus Vector for Safe and Efficient In Vivo Gene Delivery, J. Virol. (1998) 72 (12): 9873-9880). Dependent on the packaging capacity of the above mentioned viral vector-based vaccine platforms, this approach can deliver one or more nucleotide sequences that encode one or more neoantigen peptides. The sequences may be flanked by non-mutated sequences, may be separated by linkers or may be preceded with one or more sequences targeting a subcellular compartment (See, e.g., Gros et al., Prospective identification of neoantigen-specific lymphocytes in the peripheral blood of melanoma patients, Nat Med. (2016) 22 (4):433-8, Stronen et al., Targeting of cancer neoantigens with donor-derived T cell receptor repertoires, Science. (2016) 352 (6291):1337-41, Lu et al., Efficient identification of mutated cancer antigens recognized by T cells associated with durable tumor regressions, Clin Cancer Res. (2014) 20(13):3401-10). Upon introduction into a host, infected cells express the neoantigens, and thereby elicit a host immune (e.g., CTL) response against the peptide(s). Vaccinia vectors and methods useful in immunization protocols are described in, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,722,848. Another vector is BCG (Bacille Calmette Guerin). BCG vectors are described in Stover et al. (Nature 351:456-460 (1991)). A wide variety of other vaccine vectors useful for therapeutic administration or immunization of neoantigens, e.g., Salmonella typhi vectors, and the like will be apparent to those skilled in the art from the description herein.
A means of administering nucleic acids uses minigene constructs encoding one or multiple epitopes. To create a DNA sequence encoding the selected CTL epitopes (minigene) for expression in human cells, the amino acid sequences of the epitopes are reverse translated. A human codon usage table is used to guide the codon choice for each amino acid. These epitope-encoding DNA sequences are directly adjoined, creating a continuous polypeptide sequence. To optimize expression and/or immunogenicity, additional elements can be incorporated into the minigene design. Examples of amino acid sequence that could be reverse translated and included in the minigene sequence include: helper T lymphocyte, epitopes, a leader (signal) sequence, and an endoplasmic reticulum retention signal. In addition, MHC presentation of CTL epitopes can be improved by including synthetic (e.g. poly-alanine) or naturally-occurring flanking sequences adjacent to the CTL epitopes. The minigene sequence is converted to DNA by assembling oligonucleotides that encode the plus and minus strands of the minigene. Overlapping oligonucleotides (30-100 bases long) are synthesized, phosphorylated, purified and annealed under appropriate conditions using well known techniques. The ends of the oligonucleotides are joined using T4 DNA ligase. This synthetic minigene, encoding the CTL epitope polypeptide, can then cloned into a desired expression vector.
Purified plasmid DNA can be prepared for injection using a variety of formulations. The simplest of these is reconstitution of lyophilized DNA in sterile phosphate-buffer saline (PBS). A variety of methods have been described, and new techniques can become available. As noted above, nucleic acids are conveniently formulated with cationic lipids. In addition, glycolipids, fusogenic liposomes, peptides and compounds referred to collectively as protective, interactive, non-condensing (PINC) could also be complexed to purified plasmid DNA to influence variables such as stability, intramuscular dispersion, or trafficking to specific organs or cell types.
Also disclosed is a method of manufacturing a tumor vaccine, comprising performing the steps of a method disclosed herein; and producing a tumor vaccine comprising a plurality of neoantigens or a subset of the plurality of neoantigens.
Neoantigens disclosed herein can be manufactured using methods known in the art. For example, a method of producing a neoantigen or a vector (e.g., a vector including at least one sequence encoding one or more neoantigens) disclosed herein can include culturing a host cell under conditions suitable for expressing the neoantigen or vector wherein the host cell comprises at least one polynucleotide encoding the neoantigen or vector, and purifying the neoantigen or vector. Standard purification methods include chromatographic techniques, electrophoretic, immunological, precipitation, dialysis, filtration, concentration, and chromatofocusing techniques.
Host cells can include a Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cell, NSO cell, yeast, or a HEK293 cell. Host cells can be transformed with one or more polynucleotides comprising at least one nucleic acid sequence that encodes a neoantigen or vector disclosed herein, optionally wherein the isolated polynucleotide further comprises a promoter sequence operably linked to the at least one nucleic acid sequence that encodes the neoantigen or vector. In certain embodiments the isolated polynucleotide can be cDNA.
A vaccination protocol can be used to dose a subject with one or more neoantigens. A priming vaccine and a boosting vaccine can be used to dose the subject. The priming vaccine can be based on C68 (e.g., the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:1 or 2) or srRNA (e.g., the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:3 or 4) and the boosting vaccine can be based on C68 (e.g., the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:1 or 2) or srRNA (e.g., the sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:3 or 4). Each vector typically includes a cassette that includes neoantigens. Cassettes can include about 20 neoantigens, separated by spacers such as the natural sequence that normally surrounds each antigen or other non-natural spacer sequences such as AAY. Cassettes can also include MHCII antigens such a tetanus toxoid antigen and PADRE antigen, which can be considered universal class II antigens. Cassettes can also include a targeting sequence such as a ubiquitin targeting sequence. In addition, each vaccine dose can be administered to the subject in conjunction with (e.g., concurrently, before, or after) a checkpoint inhibitor (CPI). CPI's can include those that inhibit CTLA4, PD1, and/or PDL1 such as antibodies or antigen-binding portions thereof. Such antibodies can include tremelimumab or durvalumab.
A priming vaccine can be injected (e.g., intramuscularly) in a subject. Bilateral injections per dose can be used. For example, one or more injections of ChAdV68 (C68) can be used (e.g., total dose 1×1012 viral particles); one or more injections of self-replicating RNA (srRNA) at low vaccine dose selected from the range 0.001 to 1 ug RNA, in particular 0.1 or 1 ug can be used; or one or more injections of srRNA at high vaccine dose selected from the range 1 to 100 ug RNA, in particular 10 or 100 ug can be used.
A vaccine boost (boosting vaccine) can be injected (e.g., intramuscularly) after prime vaccination. A boosting vaccine can be administered about every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 weeks, e.g., every 4 weeks and/or 8 weeks after the prime. Bilateral injections per dose can be used. For example, one or more injections of ChAdV68 (C68) can be used (e.g., total dose 1×1012 viral particles); one or more injections of self-replicating RNA (srRNA) at low vaccine dose selected from the range 0.001 to 1 ug RNA, in particular 0.1 or 1 ug can be used; or one or more injections of srRNA at high vaccine dose selected from the range 1 to 100 ug RNA, in particular 10 or 100 ug can be used.
Anti-CTLA-4 (e.g., tremelimumab) can also be administered to the subject. For example, anti-CTLA4 can be administered subcutaneously near the site of the intramuscular vaccine injection (ChAdV68 prime or srRNA low doses) to ensure drainage into the same lymph node. Tremelimumab is a selective human IgG2 mAb inhibitor of CTLA-4. Target Anti-CTLA-4 (tremelimumab) subcutaneous dose is typically 70-75 mg (in particular 75 mg) with a dose range of, e.g., 1-100 mg or 5-420 mg.
In certain instances an anti-PD-L1 antibody can be used such as durvalumab (MEDI 4736). Durvalumab is a selective, high affinity human IgG1 mAb that blocks PD-L1 binding to PD-1 and CD80. Durvalumab is generally administered at 20 mg/kg i.v. every 4 weeks.
Immune monitoring can be performed before, during, and/or after vaccine administration. Such monitoring can inform safety and efficacy, among other parameters.
To perform immune monitoring, PBMCs are commonly used. PBMCs can be isolated before prime vaccination, and after prime vaccination (e.g. 4 weeks and 8 weeks). PBMCs can be harvested just prior to boost vaccinations and after each boost vaccination (e.g. 4 weeks and 8 weeks).
T cell responses can be assessed as part of an immune monitoring protocol. T cell responses can be measured using one or more methods known in the art such as ELISpot, intracellular cytokine staining, cytokine secretion and cell surface capture, T cell proliferation, MHC multimer staining, or by cytotoxicity assay. T cell responses to epitopes encoded in vaccines can be monitored from PBMCs by measuring induction of cytokines, such as IFN-gamma, using an ELISpot assay. Specific CD4 or CD8 T cell responses to epitopes encoded in vaccines can be monitored from PBMCs by measuring induction of cytokines captured intracellularly or extracellularly, such as IFN-gamma, using flow cytometry. Specific CD4 or CD8 T cell responses to epitopes encoded in the vaccines can be monitored from PBMCs by measuring T cell populations expressing T cell receptors specific for epitope/MHC class I complexes using MHC multimer staining. Specific CD4 or CD8 T cell responses to epitopes encoded in the vaccines can be monitored from PBMCs by measuring the ex vivo expansion of T cell populations following 3H-thymidine, bromodeoxyuridine and carboxyfluoresceine-diacetate-succinimidylester (CFSE) incorporation. The antigen recognition capacity and lytic activity of PBMC-derived T cells that are specific for epitopes encoded in vaccines can be assessed functionally by chromium release assay or alternative colorimetric cytotoxicity assays.
VII.A. Neoantigen Candidate Identification
Research methods for NGS analysis of tumor and normal exome and transcriptomes have been described and applied in the neoantigen identification space.6,14,15 The example below considers certain optimizations for greater sensitivity and specificity for neoantigen identification in the clinical setting. These optimizations can be grouped into two areas, those related to laboratory processes and those related to the NGS data analysis.
VII.A.1. Laboratory Process Optimizations
The process improvements presented here address challenges in high-accuracy neoantigen discovery from clinical specimens with low tumor content and small volumes by extending concepts developed for reliable cancer driver gene assessment in targeted cancer panels16 to the whole-exome and -transcriptome setting necessary for neoantigen identification. Specifically, these improvements include:
VIII.A.2. NGS Data Analysis Optimizations
Improvements in analysis methods address the suboptimal sensitivity and specificity of common research mutation calling approaches, and specifically consider customizations relevant for neoantigen identification in the clinical setting. These include:
In samples with poly-adenylated RNA, the presence of viral and microbial RNA in the RNA-seq data will be assessed using RNA CoMPASS44 or a similar method, toward the identification of additional factors that may predict patient response.
VIII.B. Isolation and Detection of HLA Peptides
Isolation of HLA-peptide molecules was performed using classic immunoprecipitation (IP) methods after lysis and solubilization of the tissue sample (55-58). A clarified lysate was used for HLA specific IP.
Immunoprecipitation was performed using antibodies coupled to beads where the antibody is specific for HLA molecules. For a pan-Class I HLA immunoprecipitation, a pan-Class I CR antibody is used, for Class II HLA-DR, an HLA-DR antibody is used. Antibody is covalently attached to NHS-sepharose beads during overnight incubation. After covalent attachment, the beads were washed and aliquoted for IP. (59, 60) Immunoprecipitations can also be performed with antibodies that are not covalently attached to beads. Typically this is done using sepharose or magnetic beads coated with Protein A and/or Protein G to hold the antibody to the column. Some antibodies that can be used to selectively enrich MHC/peptide complex are listed below.
The clarified tissue lysate is added to the antibody beads for the immunoprecipitation. After immunoprecipitation, the beads are removed from the lysate and the lysate stored for additional experiments, including additional IPs. The IP beads are washed to remove non-specific binding and the HLA/peptide complex is eluted from the beads using standard techniques. The protein components are removed from the peptides using a molecular weight spin column or C18 fractionation. The resultant peptides are taken to dryness by SpeedVac evaporation and in some instances are stored at −20 C prior to MS analysis.
Dried peptides are reconstituted in an HPLC buffer suitable for reverse phase chromatography and loaded onto a C-18 microcapillary HPLC column for gradient elution in a Fusion Lumos mass spectrometer (Thermo). MS1 spectra of peptide mass/charge (m/z) were collected in the Orbitrap detector at high resolution followed by MS2 low resolution scans collected in the ion trap detector after HCD fragmentation of the selected ion. Additionally, MS2 spectra can be obtained using either CID or ETD fragmentation methods or any combination of the three techniques to attain greater amino acid coverage of the peptide. MS2 spectra can also be measured with high resolution mass accuracy in the Orbitrap detector.
MS2 spectra from each analysis are searched against a protein database using Comet (61, 62) and the peptide identification are scored using Percolator (63-65). Additional sequencing is performed using PEAKS studio (Bioinformatics Solutions Inc.) and other search engines or sequencing methods can be used including spectral matching and de novo sequencing (97).
VIII.B.1. MS Limit of Detection Studies in Support of Comprehensive HLA Peptide Sequencing.
Using the peptide YVYVADVAAK (SEQ ID NO: 59) it was determined what the limits of detection are using different amounts of peptide loaded onto the LC column. The amounts of peptide tested were 1 pmol, 100 fmol, 10 fmol, 1 fmol, and 100 amol. (Table 1) The results are shown in
IX.A. System Overview
The presentation identification system 160 is one or computer models, embodied in a computing system as discussed below with respect to
The presentation identification system 160 determines presentation likelihoods through one or more presentation models. Specifically, the presentation models generate likelihoods of whether given peptide sequences will be presented for a set of associated MHC alleles, and are generated based on presentation information stored in store 165. For example, the presentation models may generate likelihoods of whether a peptide sequence “YVYVADVAAK (SEQ ID NO: 59) will be presented for the set of alleles HLA-A*02:01, HLA-A*03:01, HLA-B*07:02, HLA-B*08:03, HLA-C*01:04, HLA-A*06:03, HLA-B*01:04 on the cell surface of the sample. The presentation information 165 contains information on whether peptides bind to different types of MHC alleles such that those peptides are presented by MHC alleles, which in the models is determined depending on positions of amino acids in the peptide sequences. The presentation model can predict whether an unrecognized peptide sequence will be presented in association with an associated set of MHC alleles based on the presentation information 165. As previously mentioned, the presentation models may be applied to both class I and class II MHC alleles.
IX.B. Presentation Information
IX.B.1. Allele-Interacting Information
Allele-interacting information primarily includes identified peptide sequences that are known to have been presented by one or more identified MHC molecules from humans, mice, etc. Notably, this may or may not include data obtained from tumor samples. The presented peptide sequences may be identified from cells that express a single MHC allele. In this case the presented peptide sequences are generally collected from single-allele cell lines that are engineered to express a predetermined MHC allele and that are subsequently exposed to synthetic protein. Peptides presented on the MHC allele are isolated by techniques such as acid-elution and identified through mass spectrometry.
The presented peptide sequences may also be collected from cells that express multiple MHC alleles. Typically in humans, 6 different types of MHC-I and up to 12 different types of MHC-II molecules are expressed for a cell. Such presented peptide sequences may be identified from multiple-allele cell lines that are engineered to express multiple predetermined MHC alleles. Such presented peptide sequences may also be identified from tissue samples, either from normal tissue samples or tumor tissue samples. In this case particularly, the MHC molecules can be immunoprecipitated from normal or tumor tissue. Peptides presented on the multiple MHC alleles can similarly be isolated by techniques such as acid-elution and identified through mass spectrometry.
Allele-interacting information can also include mass spectrometry ion current which depends on both the concentration of peptide-MHC molecule complexes, and the ionization efficiency of peptides. The ionization efficiency varies from peptide to peptide in a sequence-dependent manner. Generally, ionization efficiency varies from peptide to peptide over approximately two orders of magnitude, while the concentration of peptide-MHC complexes varies over a larger range than that.
Allele-interacting information can also include measurements or predictions of binding affinity between a given MHC allele and a given peptide (94, 95, 96). One or more affinity models can generate such predictions. For example, going back to the example shown in
Allele-interacting information can also include measurements or predictions of stability of the MHC complex. One or more stability models that can generate such predictions. More stable peptide-MHC complexes (i.e., complexes with longer half-lives) are more likely to be presented at high copy number on tumor cells and on antigen-presenting cells that encounter vaccine antigen. For example, going back to the example shown in
Allele-interacting information can also include the measured or predicted rate of the formation reaction for the peptide-MHC complex. Complexes that form at a higher rate are more likely to be presented on the cell surface at high concentration.
Allele-interacting information can also include the sequence and length of the peptide. MHC class I molecules typically prefer to present peptides with lengths between 8 and 15 peptides. 60-80% of presented peptides have length 9. Histograms of presented peptide lengths from several cell lines are shown in
Allele-interacting information can also include the presence of kinase sequence motifs on the neoantigen encoded peptide, and the absence or presence of specific post-translational modifications on the neoantigen encoded peptide. The presence of kinase motifs affects the probability of post-translational modification, which may enhance or interfere with MHC binding.
Allele-interacting information can also include the expression or activity levels of proteins involved in the process of post-translational modification, e.g., kinases (as measured or predicted from RNA seq, mass spectrometry, or other methods).
Allele-interacting information can also include the probability of presentation of peptides with similar sequence in cells from other individuals expressing the particular MHC allele as assessed by mass-spectrometry proteomics or other means.
Allele-interacting information can also include the expression levels of the particular MHC allele in the individual in question (e.g. as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry). Peptides that bind most strongly to an MHC allele that is expressed at high levels are more likely to be presented than peptides that bind most strongly to an MHC allele that is expressed at a low level.
Allele-interacting information can also include the overall neoantigen encoded peptide-sequence-independent probability of presentation by the particular MHC allele in other individuals who express the particular MHC allele.
Allele-interacting information can also include the overall peptide-sequence-independent probability of presentation by MHC alleles in the same family of molecules (e.g., HLA-A, HLA-B, HLA-C, HLA-DQ, HLA-DR, HLA-DP) in other individuals. For example, HLA-C molecules are typically expressed at lower levels than HLA-A or HLA-B molecules, and consequently, presentation of a peptide by HLA-C is a priori less probable than presentation by HLA-A or HLA-B. For another example, HLA-DP is typically expressed at lower levels than HLA-DR or HLA-DQ; consequently, presentation of a peptide by HLA-DP is a prior less probable than presentation by HLA-DR or HLA-DQ.
Allele-interacting information can also include the protein sequence of the particular MHC allele.
Any MHC allele-noninteracting information listed in the below section can also be modeled as an MHC allele-interacting information.
IX.B.2. Allele-Noninteracting Information
Allele-noninteracting information can include C-terminal sequences flanking the neoantigen encoded peptide within its source protein sequence. For MHC-I, C-terminal flanking sequences may impact proteasomal processing of peptides. However, the C-terminal flanking sequence is cleaved from the peptide by the proteasome before the peptide is transported to the endoplasmic reticulum and encounters MHC alleles on the surfaces of cells. Consequently, MHC molecules receive no information about the C-terminal flanking sequence, and thus, the effect of the C-terminal flanking sequence cannot vary depending on MHC allele type. For example, going back to the example shown in
Allele-noninteracting information can also include mRNA quantification measurements. For example, mRNA quantification data can be obtained for the same samples that provide the mass spectrometry training data. As later described in reference to
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the N-terminal sequences flanking the peptide within its source protein sequence.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the source gene of the peptide sequence. The source gene may be defined as the Ensembl protein family of the peptide sequence. In other examples, the source gene may be defined as the source DNA or the source RNA of the peptide sequence. The source gene can, for example, be represented as a string of nucleotides that encode for a protein, or alternatively be more categorically represented based on a named set of known DNA or RNA sequences that are known to encode specific proteins. In another example, allele-noninteracting information can also include the source transcript or isoform or set of potential source transcripts or isoforms of the peptide sequence drawn from a database such as Ensembl or RefSeq.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the presence of protease cleavage motifs in the peptide, optionally weighted according to the expression of corresponding proteases in the tumor cells (as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry). Peptides that contain protease cleavage motifs are less likely to be presented, because they will be more readily degraded by proteases, and will therefore be less stable within the cell.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the turnover rate of the source protein as measured in the appropriate cell type. Faster turnover rate (i.e., lower half-life) increases the probability of presentation; however, the predictive power of this feature is low if measured in a dissimilar cell type.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the length of the source protein, optionally considering the specific splice variants (“isoforms”) most highly expressed in the tumor cells as measured by RNA-seq or proteome mass spectrometry, or as predicted from the annotation of germline or somatic splicing mutations detected in DNA or RNA sequence data.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the level of expression of the proteasome, immunoproteasome, thymoproteasome, or other proteases in the tumor cells (which may be measured by RNA-seq, proteome mass spectrometry, or immunohistochemistry). Different proteasomes have different cleavage site preferences. More weight will be given to the cleavage preferences of each type of proteasome in proportion to its expression level.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the expression of the source gene of the peptide (e.g., as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry). Possible optimizations include adjusting the measured expression to account for the presence of stromal cells and tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes within the tumor sample. Peptides from more highly expressed genes are more likely to be presented. Peptides from genes with undetectable levels of expression can be excluded from consideration.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the probability that the source mRNA of the neoantigen encoded peptide will be subject to nonsense-mediated decay as predicted by a model of nonsense-mediated decay, for example, the model from Rivas et al, Science 2015.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the typical tissue-specific expression of the source gene of the peptide during various stages of the cell cycle. Genes that are expressed at a low level overall (as measured by RNA-seq or mass spectrometry proteomics) but that are known to be expressed at a high level during specific stages of the cell cycle are likely to produce more presented peptides than genes that are stably expressed at very low levels.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include a comprehensive catalog of features of the source protein as given in e.g. uniProt or PDB http://www.rcsb.org/pdb/home/home.do. These features may include, among others: the secondary and tertiary structures of the protein, subcellular localization 11, Gene ontology (GO) terms. Specifically, this information may contain annotations that act at the level of the protein, e.g., 5′ UTR length, and annotations that act at the level of specific residues, e.g., helix motif between residues 300 and 310. These features can also include turn motifs, sheet motifs, and disordered residues.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include features describing the properties of the domain of the source protein containing the peptide, for example: secondary or tertiary structure (e.g., alpha helix vs beta sheet); Alternative splicing.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include features describing the presence or absence of a presentation hotspot at the position of the peptide in the source protein of the peptide.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the probability of presentation of peptides from the source protein of the peptide in question in other individuals (after adjusting for the expression level of the source protein in those individuals and the influence of the different HLA types of those individuals).
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the probability that the peptide will not be detected or over-represented by mass spectrometry due to technical biases.
The expression of various gene modules/pathways as measured by a gene expression assay such as RNASeq, microarray(s), targeted panel(s) such as Nanostring, or single/multi-gene representatives of gene modules measured by assays such as RT-PCR (which need not contain the source protein of the peptide) that are informative about the state of the tumor cells, stroma, or tumor-infiltrating lymphocytes (TILs).
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the copy number of the source gene of the peptide in the tumor cells. For example, peptides from genes that are subject to homozygous deletion in tumor cells can be assigned a probability of presentation of zero.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the probability that the peptide binds to the TAP or the measured or predicted binding affinity of the peptide to the TAP. Peptides that are more likely to bind to the TAP, or peptides that bind the TAP with higher affinity are more likely to be presented by MHC-I.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the expression level of TAP in the tumor cells (which may be measured by RNA-seq, proteome mass spectrometry, immunohistochemistry). For MHC-I, higher TAP expression levels increase the probability of presentation of all peptides.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the presence or absence of tumor mutations, including, but not limited to:
Presence or absence of functional germline polymorphisms, including, but not limited to:
Allele-noninteracting information can also include tumor type (e.g., NSCLC, melanoma).
Allele-noninteracting information can also include known functionality of HLA alleles, as reflected by, for instance HLA allele suffixes. For example, the N suffix in the allele name HLA-A*24:09N indicates a null allele that is not expressed and is therefore unlikely to present epitopes; the full HLA allele suffix nomenclature is described at https://www.ebi.ac.uk/ipd/imgt/hla/nomenclature/suffixes.html.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include clinical tumor subtype (e.g., squamous lung cancer vs. non-squamous).
Allele-noninteracting information can also include smoking history.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include history of sunburn, sun exposure, or exposure to other mutagens.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the typical expression of the source gene of the peptide in the relevant tumor type or clinical subtype, optionally stratified by driver mutation. Genes that are typically expressed at high levels in the relevant tumor type are more likely to be presented.
Allele-noninteracting information can also include the frequency of the mutation in all tumors, or in tumors of the same type, or in tumors from individuals with at least one shared MHC allele, or in tumors of the same type in individuals with at least one shared MHC allele.
In the case of a mutated tumor-specific peptide, the list of features used to predict a probability of presentation may also include the annotation of the mutation (e.g., missense, read-through, frameshift, fusion, etc.) or whether the mutation is predicted to result in nonsense-mediated decay (NMD). For example, peptides from protein segments that are not translated in tumor cells due to homozygous early-stop mutations can be assigned a probability of presentation of zero. NMD results in decreased mRNA translation, which decreases the probability of presentation.
IX.C. Presentation Identification System
IX.C.1. Data Management Module
The data management module 312 generates sets of training data 170 from the presentation information 165. Each set of training data contains a plurality of data instances, in which each data instance i contains a set of independent variables zi that include at least a presented or non-presented peptide sequence pi, one or more associated MHC alleles ai associated with the peptide sequence pi, and a dependent variable yi that represents information that the presentation identification system 160 is interested in predicting for new values of independent variables.
In one particular implementation referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the dependent variable yi is a binary label indicating whether peptide pi was presented by the one or more associated MHC alleles ai. However, it is appreciated that in other implementations, the dependent variable yi can represent any other kind of information that the presentation identification system 160 is interested in predicting dependent on the independent variables zi. For example, in another implementation, the dependent variable yi may also be a numerical value indicating the mass spectrometry ion current identified for the data instance.
The peptide sequence pi for data instance i is a sequence of ki amino acids, in which ki may vary between data instances i within a range. For example, that range may be 8-15 for MHC class I or 6-30 for MHC class II. In one specific implementation of system 160, all peptide sequences pi in a training data set may have the same length, e.g. 9. The number of amino acids in a peptide sequence may vary depending on the type of MHC alleles (e.g., MHC alleles in humans, etc.). The MHC alleles ai for data instance i indicate which MHC alleles were present in association with the corresponding peptide sequence pi.
The data management module 312 may also include additional allele-interacting variables, such as binding affinity bi and stability si predictions in conjunction with the peptide sequences pi and associated MHC alleles a contained in the training data 170. For example, the training data 170 may contain binding affinity predictions bi between a peptide pi and each of the associated MHC molecules indicated in ai. As another example, the training data 170 may contain stability predictions si for each of the MHC alleles indicated in ai.
The data management module 312 may also include allele-noninteracting variables wi, such as C-terminal flanking sequences and mRNA quantification measurements in conjunction with the peptide sequences pi.
The data management module 312 also identifies peptide sequences that are not presented by MHC alleles to generate the training data 170. Generally, this involves identifying the “longer” sequences of source protein that include presented peptide sequences prior to presentation. When the presentation information contains engineered cell lines, the data management module 312 identifies a series of peptide sequences in the synthetic protein to which the cells were exposed to that were not presented on MHC alleles of the cells. When the presentation information contains tissue samples, the data management module 312 identifies source proteins from which presented peptide sequences originated from, and identifies a series of peptide sequences in the source protein that were not presented on MHC alleles of the tissue sample cells.
The data management module 312 may also artificially generate peptides with random sequences of amino acids and identify the generated sequences as peptides not presented on MHC alleles. This can be accomplished by randomly generating peptide sequences allows the data management module 312 to easily generate large amounts of synthetic data for peptides not presented on MHC alleles. Since in reality, a small percentage of peptide sequences are presented by MHC alleles, the synthetically generated peptide sequences are highly likely not to have been presented by MHC alleles even if they were included in proteins processed by cells.
IX.C.2. Encoding Module
The encoding module 314 encodes information contained in the training data 170 into a numerical representation that can be used to generate the one or more presentation models. In one implementation, the encoding module 314 one-hot encodes sequences (e.g., peptide sequences or C-terminal flanking sequences) over a predetermined 20-letter amino acid alphabet. Specifically, a peptide sequence pi with ki amino acids is represented as a row vector of 20-ki elements, where a single element among pi20(j−1)+1, pi20(j−1)+2, . . . , pi20j that corresponds to the alphabet of the amino acid at the j-th position of the peptide sequence has a value of 1. Otherwise, the remaining elements have a value of 0. As an example, for a given alphabet {A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M, N, P, Q, R, S, T, V, W, Y}, the peptide sequence EAF of 3 amino acids for data instance i may be represented by the row vector of 60 elements pi=[0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]. The C-terminal flanking sequence ci can be similarly encoded as described above, as well as the protein sequence dh for MHC alleles, and other sequence data in the presentation information.
When the training data 170 contains sequences of differing lengths of amino acids, the encoding module 314 may further encode the peptides into equal-length vectors by adding a PAD character to extend the predetermined alphabet. For example, this may be performed by left-padding the peptide sequences with the PAD character until the length of the peptide sequence reaches the peptide sequence with the greatest length in the training data 170. Thus, when the peptide sequence with the greatest length has kmax amino acids, the encoding module 314 numerically represents each sequence as a row vector of (20+1)·kmax elements. As an example, for the extended alphabet {PAD, A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M, N, P, Q, R, S, T, V, W, Y} and a maximum amino acid length of kmax=5, the same example peptide sequence EAF of 3 amino acids may be represented by the row vector of 105 elements pi=[1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]. The C-terminal flanking sequence ci or other sequence data can be similarly encoded as described above. Thus, each independent variable or column in the peptide sequence pi or ci represents presence of a particular amino acid at a particular position of the sequence.
Although the above method of encoding sequence data was described in reference to sequences having amino acid sequences, the method can similarly be extended to other types of sequence data, such as DNA or RNA sequence data, and the like.
The encoding module 314 also encodes the one or more MHC alleles ai for data instance i as a row vector of m elements, in which each element h=1, 2, . . . , m corresponds to a unique identified MHC allele. The elements corresponding to the MHC alleles identified for the data instance i have a value of 1. Otherwise, the remaining elements have a value of 0. As an example, the alleles HLA-B*07:02 and HLA-C*01:03 for a data instance i corresponding to a multiple-allele cell line among m=4 unique identified MHC allele types {HLA-A*01:01, HLA-C*01:08, HLA-B*07:02, HLA-C*01:03} may be represented by the row vector of 4 elements ai=[0 0 1 1], in which a3i=1 and a4i=1. As another example, the elements corresponding to the MHC alleles identified for the data instance i have a value of 1. Otherwise, the remaining elements have a value of 0. As an example, the alleles HLA-B*07:02 and HLA-DRB1*10:01 for a data instance i corresponding to a multiple-allele cell line among m=4 unique identified MHC allele types {HLA-A*01:01, HLA-C*01:08, HLA-B*07:02, HLA-DRB1*10:01} may be represented by the row vector of 4 elements ai=[0 0 1 1], in which a3i=1 and a4i=1. Although the examples described herein with 4 identified MHC allele types, the number of MHC allele types can be hundreds or thousands in practice. As previously discussed, each data instance i typically contains at most 6 different MHC class I allele types in association with the peptide sequence pi, and/or at most 4 different MHC class II DR allele types in association with the peptide sequence pi, and/or at most 12 different MHC class II allele types in association with the peptide sequence pi.
The encoding module 314 also encodes the label yi for each data instance i as a binary variable having values from the set of {0, 1}, in which a value of 1 indicates that peptide xi was presented by one of the associated MHC alleles a, and a value of 0 indicates that peptide xi was not presented by any of the associated MHC alleles a. When the dependent variable yi represents the mass spectrometry ion current, the encoding module 314 may additionally scale the values using various functions, such as the log function having a range of [−∞, ∞] for ion current values between [0, ∞].
The encoding module 314 may represent a pair of allele-interacting variables xhi for peptide pi and an associated MHC allele h as a row vector in which numerical representations of allele-interacting variables are concatenated one after the other. For example, the encoding module 314 may represent xhi as a row vector equal to [pi], [pi bhi], [pi shi], or [pi bhi shi], where bhi is the binding affinity prediction for peptide pi and associated MHC allele h, and similarly for shi for stability. Alternatively, one or more combination of allele-interacting variables may be stored individually (e.g., as individual vectors or matrices).
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents binding affinity information by incorporating measured or predicted values for binding affinity in the allele-interacting variables xhi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents binding stability information by incorporating measured or predicted values for binding stability in the allele-interacting variables xhi,
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents binding on-rate information by incorporating measured or predicted values for binding on-rate in the allele-interacting variables xhi.
In one instance, for peptides presented by class I MHC molecules, the encoding module 314 represents peptide length as a vector Tk=[(Lk=8)
(Lk=9)
(Lk=10)
(Lk=11)
(Lk=12)
(Lk=13)
(Lk=14)
(Lk=15)] where
is the indicator function, and Lk denotes the length of peptide pk. The vector Tk can be included in the allele-interacting variables xhi. In another instance, for peptides presented by class II MHC molecules, the encoding module 314 represents peptide length as a vector Tk=[
(Lk=6)
(Lk=7)
(Lk=8)
(Lk=9)
(Lk=10)
(Lk=11)
(Lk=12)
(Lk=13)
(Lk=14)
(Lk=15)
(Lk=16)
(Lk=17)
(Lk=18)
(Lk=19)
(Lk=20)
(Lk=21)
(Lk=22)
(Lk=23)
(Lk=24)
(Lk=25)
(Lk=26)
(Lk=27)
(Lk=28)
(Lk=29)
(Lk=30)] where
is the indicator function, and Lk denotes the length of peptide pk. The vector Tk can be included in the allele-interacting variables xhi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents RNA expression information of MHC alleles by incorporating RNA-seq based expression levels of MHC alleles in the allele-interacting variables xhi.
Similarly, the encoding module 314 may represent the allele-noninteracting variables wi as a row vector in which numerical representations of allele-noninteracting variables are concatenated one after the other. For example, wi may be a row vector equal to [ci] or [ci mi wi] in which wi is a row vector representing any other allele-noninteracting variables in addition to the C-terminal flanking sequence of peptide pi and the mRNA quantification measurement mi associated with the peptide. Alternatively, one or more combination of allele-noninteracting variables may be stored individually (e.g., as individual vectors or matrices).
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents turnover rate of source protein for a peptide sequence by incorporating the turnover rate or half-life in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents length of source protein or isoform by incorporating the protein length in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents activation of immunoproteasome by incorporating the mean expression of the immunoproteasome-specific proteasome subunits including the β1i, β2i, β5i subunits in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the RNA-seq abundance of the source protein of the peptide or gene or transcript of a peptide (quantified in units of FPKM, TPM by techniques such as RSEM) can be incorporating the abundance of the source protein in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the probability that the transcript of origin of a peptide will undergo nonsense-mediated decay (NMD) as estimated by the model in, for example, Rivas et. al. Science, 2015 by incorporating this probability in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the activation status of a gene module or pathway assessed via RNA-seq by, for example, quantifying expression of the genes in the pathway in units of TPM using e.g., RSEM for each of the genes in the pathway then computing a summary statistics, e.g., the mean, across genes in the pathway. The mean can be incorporated in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the copy number of the source gene by incorporating the copy number in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the TAP binding affinity by including the measured or predicted TAP binding affinity (e.g., in nanomolar units) in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents TAP expression levels by including TAP expression levels measured by RNA-seq (and quantified in units of TPM by e.g., RSEM) in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents tumor mutations as a vector of indicator variables (i.e., dk=1 if peptide pk comes from a sample with a KRAS G12D mutation and 0 otherwise) in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents germline polymorphisms in antigen presentation genes as a vector of indicator variables (i.e., dk=1 if peptide pk comes from a sample with a specific germline polymorphism in the TAP). These indicator variables can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents tumor type as a length-one one-hot encoded vector over the alphabet of tumor types (e.g., NSCLC, melanoma, colorectal cancer, etc). These one-hot-encoded variables can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents MHC allele suffixes by treating 4-digit HLA alleles with different suffixes. For example, HLA-A*24:09N is considered a different allele from HLA-A*24:09 for the purpose of the model. Alternatively, the probability of presentation by an N-suffixed MHC allele can be set to zero for all peptides, because HLA alleles ending in the N suffix are not expressed.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents tumor subtype as a length-one one-hot encoded vector over the alphabet of tumor subtypes (e.g., lung adenocarcinoma, lung squamous cell carcinoma, etc). These one hot-encoded variables can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents smoking history as a binary indicator variable (dk=1 if the patient has a smoking history, and 0 otherwise), that can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi. Alternatively, smoking history can be encoded as a length-one one-hot-encoded variable over an alphabet of smoking severity. For example, smoking status can be rated on a 1-5 scale, where 1 indicates nonsmokers, and 5 indicates current heavy smokers. Because smoking history is primarily relevant to lung tumors, when training a model on multiple tumor types, this variable can also be defined to be equal to 1 if the patient has a history of smoking and the tumor type is lung tumors and zero otherwise.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents sunburn history as a binary indicator variable (dk=1 if the patient has a history of severe sunburn, and 0 otherwise), which can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi. Because severe sunburn is primarily relevant to melanomas, when training a model on multiple tumor types, this variable can also be defined to be equal to 1 if the patient has a history of severe sunburn and the tumor type is melanoma and zero otherwise.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents distribution of expression levels of a particular gene or transcript for each gene or transcript in the human genome as summary statistics (e,g., mean, median) of distribution of expression levels by using reference databases such as TCGA. Specifically, for a peptide pk in a sample with tumor type melanoma, we can include not only the measured gene or transcript expression level of the gene or transcript of origin of peptide pk in the allele-noninteracting variables wi, but also the mean and/or median gene or transcript expression of the gene or transcript of origin of peptide pk in melanomas as measured by TCGA.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents mutation type as a length-one one-hot-encoded variable over the alphabet of mutation types (e.g., missense, frameshift, NMD-inducing, etc). These one hot-encoded variables can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents protein-level features of protein as the value of the annotation (e.g., 5′ UTR length) of the source protein in the allele-noninteracting variables wi. In another instance, the encoding module 314 represents residue-level annotations of the source protein for peptide pi by including an indicator variable, that is equal to 1 if peptide pi overlaps with a helix motif and 0 otherwise, or that is equal to 1 if peptide pi is completely contained with within a helix motif in the allele-noninteracting variables wi. In another instance, a feature representing proportion of residues in peptide pi that are contained within a helix motif annotation can be included in the allele-noninteracting variables wi.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents type of proteins or isoforms in the human proteome as an indicator vector ok that has a length equal to the number of proteins or isoforms in the human proteome, and the corresponding element oki is 1 if peptide pk comes from protein i and 0 otherwise.
In one instance, the encoding module 314 represents the source gene G=gene(pi) of peptide pi as a categorical variable with L possible categories, where L denotes the upper limit of the number of indexed source genes 1, 2, . . . , L.
The encoding module 314 may also represent the overall set of variables zi for peptide pi and an associated MHC allele h as a row vector in which numerical representations of the allele-interacting variables xi and the allele-noninteracting variables wi are concatenated one after the other. For example, the encoding module 314 may represent zhi as a row vector equal to [xhi wi] or [wi xhi].
The training module 316 constructs one or more presentation models that generate likelihoods of whether peptide sequences will be presented by MHC alleles associated with the peptide sequences. Specifically, given a peptide sequence pk and a set of MHC alleles ak associated with the peptide sequence pk, each presentation model generates an estimate uk indicating a likelihood that the peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more of the associated MHC alleles ak.
X.A. Overview
The training module 316 constructs the one more presentation models based on the training data sets stored in store 170 generated from the presentation information stored in 165. Generally, regardless of the specific type of presentation model, all of the presentation models capture the dependence between independent variables and dependent variables in the training data 170 such that a loss function is minimized. Specifically, the loss function ϑ (yi∈S ui∈S; θ) represents discrepancies between values of dependent variables yi∈S for one or more data instances S in the training data 170 and the estimated likelihoods ui∈S for the data instances S generated by the presentation model. In one particular implementation referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the loss function (yi∈S, ui∈S; θ) is the negative log likelihood function given by equation (1a) as follows:
However, in practice, another loss function may be used. For example, when predictions are made for the mass spectrometry ion current, the loss function is the mean squared loss given by equation 1b as follows:
The presentation model may be a parametric model in which one or more parameters θ mathematically specify the dependence between the independent variables and dependent variables. Typically, various parameters of parametric-type presentation models that minimize the loss function (yi∈S, ui∈S; θ) are determined through gradient-based numerical optimization algorithms, such as batch gradient algorithms, stochastic gradient algorithms, and the like. Alternatively, the presentation model may be a non-parametric model in which the model structure is determined from the training data 170 and is not strictly based on a fixed set of parameters.
X.B. Per-Allele Models
The training module 316 may construct the presentation models to predict presentation likelihoods of peptides on a per-allele basis. In this case, the training module 316 may train the presentation models based on data instances S in the training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles.
In one implementation, the training module 316 models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk for a specific allele h by:
u
k
h
=Pr(pk presented; MHC allele h)=ƒ(gh(xhk;θh)), (2)
where peptide sequence xhk denotes the encoded allele-interacting variables for peptide pk and corresponding MHC allele h, ƒ(⋅) is any function, and is herein throughout is referred to as a transformation function for convenience of description. Further, gh(⋅) is any function, is herein throughout referred to as a dependency function for convenience of description, and generates dependency scores for the allele-interacting variables xhk based on a set of parameters θh determined for MHC allele h. The values for the set of parameters θh for each MHC allele h can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θh, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing the single MHC allele h.
The output of the dependency function gh(xhk;θh) represents a dependency score for the MHC allele h indicating whether the MHC allele h will present the corresponding neoantigen based on at least the allele interacting features xhk, and in particular, based on positions of amino acids of the peptide sequence of peptide pk. For example, the dependency score for the MHC allele h may have a high value if the MHC allele h is likely to present the peptide pk, and may have a low value if presentation is not likely. The transformation function ƒ(⋅) transforms the input, and more specifically, transforms the dependency score generated by gh(xhk;θh) in this case, to an appropriate value to indicate the likelihood that the peptide pk will be presented by an MHC allele.
In one particular implementation referred throughout the remainder of the specification, ƒ(⋅) is a function having the range within [0, 1] for an appropriate domain range. In one example, ƒ(⋅) is the expit function given by:
As another example, ƒ(⋅) can also be the hyperbolic tangent function given by:
ƒ(z)=tanh(z) (5)
when the values for the domain z is equal to or greater than 0. Alternatively, when predictions are made for the mass spectrometry ion current that have values outside the range [0, 1], ƒ(⋅) can be any function such as the identity function, the exponential function, the log function, and the like.
Thus, the per-allele likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by a MHC allele h can be generated by applying the dependency function gh(⋅) for the MHC allele h to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk to generate the corresponding dependency score. The dependency score may be transformed by the transformation function ƒ(⋅) to generate a per-allele likelihood that the peptide sequence pk will be presented by the MHC allele h.
X.B.1 Dependency Functions for Allele Interacting Variables
In one particular implementation referred throughout the specification, the dependency function gh(⋅) is an affine function given by:
g
h(xhi;θh)=xhi·θh. (6)
that linearly combines each allele-interacting variable in xhk with a corresponding parameter in the set of parameters θh determined for the associated MHC allele h.
In another particular implementation referred throughout the specification, the dependency function gh(⋅) is a network function given by:
g
h(xhi;θh)=NNh(xhi;θh). (7)
represented by a network model NNh(⋅) having a series of nodes arranged in one or more layers. A node may be connected to other nodes through connections each having an associated parameter in the set of parameters θh. A value at one particular node may be represented as a sum of the values of nodes connected to the particular node weighted by the associated parameter mapped by an activation function associated with the particular node. In contrast to the affine function, network models are advantageous because the presentation model can incorporate non-linearity and process data having different lengths of amino acid sequences. Specifically, through non-linear modeling, network models can capture interaction between amino acids at different positions in a peptide sequence and how this interaction affects peptide presentation.
In general, network models NNh(⋅) may be structured as feed-forward networks, such as artificial neural networks (ANN), convolutional neural networks (CNN), deep neural networks (DNN), and/or recurrent networks, such as long short-term memory networks (LSTM), bi-directional recurrent networks, deep bi-directional recurrent networks, and the like.
In one instance referred throughout the remainder of the specification, each MHC allele in h=1, 2, . . . , m is associated with a separate network model, and NNh(⋅) denotes the output(s) from a network model associated with MHC allele h.
In another instance, the identified MHC alleles h=1, 2, . . . , m are associated with a single network model NNH(⋅), and NNh(⋅) denotes one or more outputs of the single network model associated with MHC allele h. In such an instance, the set of parameters θh may correspond to a set of parameters for the single network model, and thus, the set of parameters θh may be shared by all MHC alleles.
In yet another instance, the single network model NNH(⋅) may be a network model that outputs a dependency score given the allele interacting variables xhk and the encoded protein sequence dh of an MHC allele h. In such an instance, the set of parameters θh may again correspond to a set of parameters for the single network model, and thus, the set of parameters θh may be shared by all MHC alleles. Thus, in such an instance, NNh(⋅) may denote the output of the single network model NNH(⋅) given inputs [xkk dh] to the single network model. Such a network model is advantageous because peptide presentation probabilities for MHC alleles that were unknown in the training data can be predicted just by identification of their protein sequence.
In yet another instance, the dependency function gh(⋅) can be expressed as:
g
h(xhk;θh)=g′h(xhk;θ′h)+0
where g′h(xhk;θ′h) is the affine function with a set of parameters θ′h, the network function, or the like, with a bias parameter θh0 in the set of parameters for allele interacting variables for the MHC allele that represents a baseline probability of presentation for the MHC allele h.
In another implementation, the bias parameter θh0 may be shared according to the gene family of the MHC allele h. That is, the bias parameter θh0 for MHC allele h may be equal to θgene(h)
Returning to equation (2), as an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC allele h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine dependency function gh(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
3=ƒ(x3k·θ3),
where x3k are the identified allele-interacting variables for MHC allele h=3, and θ3 are the set of parameters determined for MHC allele h=3 through loss function minimization.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC allele h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using separate network transformation functions gh(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
3=ƒ(NN3(x3k;θ3)),
where x3k are the identified allele-interacting variables for MHC allele h=3, and 03 are the set of parameters determined for the network model NN3(⋅) associated with MHC allele h=3.
X.B.2. Per-Allele with Allele-Noninteracting Variables
In one implementation, the training module 316 incorporates allele-noninteracting variables and models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk by:
u
k
h
=Pr(pk presented)=ƒ(gw(wk;θw)+gh(xhi;θh)), (8)
where wk denotes the encoded allele-noninteracting variables for peptide pk, gw(⋅) is a function for the allele-noninteracting variables wk based on a set of parameters θw determined for the allele-noninteracting variables. Specifically, the values for the set of parameters θh for each MHC allele h and the set of parameters θw for allele-noninteracting variables can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θh and θw, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles.
The output of the dependency function gw(wk;θw) represents a dependency score for the allele noninteracting variables indicating whether the peptide pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles based on the impact of allele noninteracting variables. For example, the dependency score for the allele noninteracting variables may have a high value if the peptide pk is associated with a C-terminal flanking sequence that is known to positively impact presentation of the peptide pk, and may have a low value if the peptide pk is associated with a C-terminal flanking sequence that is known to negatively impact presentation of the peptide pk.
According to equation (8), the per-allele likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by a MHC allele h can be generated by applying the function gh(⋅) for the MHC allele h to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk to generate the corresponding dependency score for allele interacting variables. The function gw(⋅) for the allele noninteracting variables are also applied to the encoded version of the allele noninteracting variables to generate the dependency score for the allele noninteracting variables. Both scores are combined, and the combined score is transformed by the transformation function ƒ(⋅) to generate a per-allele likelihood that the peptide sequence pk will be presented by the MHC allele h.
Alternatively, the training module 316 may include allele-noninteracting variables wk in the prediction by adding the allele-noninteracting variables wk to the allele-interacting variables xhk in equation (2). Thus, the presentation likelihood can be given by:
u
k
h
=Pr(pk presented; allele h)=ƒ(gh([xhkwk];θh)). (9)
X.B.3 Dependency Functions for Allele-Noninteracting Variables
Similarly to the dependency function gh(⋅) for allele-interacting variables, the dependency function gw(⋅) for allele noninteracting variables may be an affine function or a network function in which a separate network model is associated with allele-noninteracting variables wk.
Specifically, the dependency function gw(⋅) is an affine function given by:
g
w(wk;θw)=wkθw.
that linearly combines the allele-noninteracting variables in wk with a corresponding parameter in the set of parameters θw.
The dependency function gw(⋅) may also be a network function given by:
g
h(wk;θw)=NNw(wk;θw).
represented by a network model NNw(⋅) having an associated parameter in the set of parameters θw. The network function may also include one or more network models each taking different allele noninteracting variables as input.
In another instance, the dependency function gw(⋅) for the allele-noninteracting variables can be given by:
g
w(wk;θw)=g′w(wk;θ′w)+h(mk;θwm), (10)
where g′w(wk;θ′w) is the affine function, the network function with the set of allele noninteracting parameters θ′w, or the like, mk is the mRNA quantification measurement for peptide pk, h(⋅) is a function transforming the quantification measurement, and θwm is a parameter in the set of parameters for allele noninteracting variables that is combined with the mRNA quantification measurement to generate a dependency score for the mRNA quantification measurement. In one particular embodiment referred throughout the remainder of the specification, h(⋅) is the log function, however in practice h(⋅) may be any one of a variety of different functions.
In yet another instance, the dependency function gw(⋅) for the allele-noninteracting variables can be given by:
g
w(wk;θw)=g′w(wk;θ′w)+θwo·ok, (11)
where g′w(wk;θ′w) is the affine function, the network function with the set of allele noninteracting parameters θ′w, or the like, ok is the indicator vector described above representing proteins and isoforms in the human proteome for peptide pk, and θwo is a set of parameters in the set of parameters for allele noninteracting variables that is combined with the indicator vector. In one variation, when the dimensionality of ok and the set of parameters θwo are significantly high, a parameter regularization term, such as λ·∥θwo|, where ∥⋅∥ represents L1 norm, L2 norm, a combination, or the like, can be added to the loss function when determining the value of the parameters. The optimal value of the hyperparameter λ can be determined through appropriate methods.
In yet another instance, the dependency function gw(⋅) for the allele-noninteracting variables can be given by:
where g′w(wk;θ′w) is the affine function, the network function with the set of allele noninteracting parameters θ′w, or the like, (gene(pk=l)) is the indicator function that equals to 1 if peptide pk is from source gene l as describe above in reference to allele noninteracting variables, and θwl is a parameter indicating “antigenicity” of source gene l. In one variation, when L is significantly high, and thus, the number of parameters θwl=1, 2, . . . , L are significantly high, a parameter regularization term, such as λ·∥θwl, where ∥⋅∥ represents L1 norm, L2 norm, a combination, or the like, can be added to the loss function when determining the value of the parameters. The optimal value of the hyperparameter λ can be determined through appropriate methods.
In practice, the additional terms of any of equations (10), (11), and (12) may be combined to generate the dependency function gw(⋅) for allele noninteracting variables. For example, the term h(⋅) indicating mRNA quantification measurement in equation (10) and the term indicating source gene antigenicity in equation (12) may be summed together along with any other affine or network function to generate the dependency function for allele noninteracting variables.
Returning to equation (8), as an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC allele h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
3=ƒ(wk·θw+x3k·θ3),
where wk are the identified allele-noninteracting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for the allele-noninteracting variables.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC allele h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
3=ƒ(NNw(wk;θw)+NN3(x3k;θ3))
where wk are the identified allele-interacting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for allele-noninteracting variables.
X.C. Multiple-Allele Models
The training module 316 may also construct the presentation models to predict presentation likelihoods of peptides in a multiple-allele setting where two or more MHC alleles are present. In this case, the training module 316 may train the presentation models based on data instances S in the training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles, cells expressing multiple MHC alleles, or a combination thereof.
X.C.1. Example 1: Maximum of Per-Allele Models
In one implementation, the training module 316 models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk in association with a set of multiple MHC alleles H as a function of the presentation likelihoods ukh∈H determined for each of the MHC alleles h in the set H determined based on cells expressing single-alleles, as described above in conjunction with equations (2)-(11). Specifically, the presentation likelihood uk can be any function of ukh∈H. In one implementation, as shown in equation (12), the function is the maximum function, and the presentation likelihood uk can be determined as the maximum of the presentation likelihoods for each MHC allele h in the set H.
u
k
=Pr(pk presented; alleles H)=max(ukh∈H).
X.C.2. Example 2.1: Function-of-Sums Models
In one implementation, the training module 316 models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk by:
where elements ahk are 1 for the multiple MHC alleles H associated with peptide sequence pk and xhk denotes the encoded allele-interacting variables for peptide pk and the corresponding MHC alleles. The values for the set of parameters θh for each MHC allele h can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θh, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles and/or cells expressing multiple MHC alleles. The dependency function gh may be in the form of any of the dependency functions gh introduced above in sections X.B.1.
According to equation (13), the presentation likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles h can be generated by applying the dependency function gh(⋅) to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk for each of the MHC alleles H to generate the corresponding score for the allele interacting variables. The scores for each MHC allele h are combined, and transformed by the transformation function ƒ(⋅) to generate the presentation likelihood that peptide sequence pk will be presented by the set of MHC alleles H.
The presentation model of equation (13) is different from the per-allele model of equation (2), in that the number of associated alleles for each peptide pk can be greater than 1. In other words, more than one element in ahk can have values of 1 for the multiple MHC alleles H associated with peptide sequence pk.
As an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(x2k·θ2+x3k·θ3),
where x2k, x3k are the identified allele-interacting variables for MHC alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2, θ3 are the set of parameters determined for MHC alleles h=2, h=3.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(NN2(x2k;θ2)+NN3(x3k;θ3)),
where NN2(⋅), NN3(⋅) are the identified network models for MHC alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2, θ3 are the set of parameters determined for MHC alleles h=2, h=3.
X.C.3. Example 2.2: Function-of-Sums Models with Allele-Noninteracting Variables
In one implementation, the training module 316 incorporates allele-noninteracting variables and models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk by:
where wk denotes the encoded allele-noninteracting variables for peptide pk. Specifically, the values for the set of parameters θh for each MHC allele h and the set of parameters θw for allele-noninteracting variables can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θh and θw, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles and/or cells expressing multiple MHC alleles. The dependency function gw may be in the form of any of the dependency functions gw introduced above in sections X.B.3.
Thus, according to equation (14), the presentation likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles H can be generated by applying the function gh(⋅) to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk for each of the MHC alleles H to generate the corresponding dependency score for allele interacting variables for each MHC allele h. The function gw(⋅) for the allele noninteracting variables is also applied to the encoded version of the allele noninteracting variables to generate the dependency score for the allele noninteracting variables. The scores are combined, and the combined score is transformed by the transformation function ƒ(⋅) to generate the presentation likelihood that peptide sequence pk will be presented by the MHC alleles H.
In the presentation model of equation (14), the number of associated alleles for each peptide pk can be greater than 1. In other words, more than one element in ahk can have values of 1 for the multiple MHC alleles H associated with peptide sequence pk.
As an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(wk·θw+x2k·θ2+x3k·θ3),
where wk are the identified allele-noninteracting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for the allele-noninteracting variables.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(NNw(wk;θw)+NN2(x2k;θ2)+NN3(x3k;θ3))
where wk are the identified allele-interacting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for allele-noninteracting variables.
Alternatively, the training module 316 may include allele-noninteracting variables wk in the prediction by adding the allele-noninteracting variables wk to the allele-interacting variables xhk in equation (15). Thus, the presentation likelihood can be given by:
X.C.4. Example 3.1: Models Using Implicit Per-Allele Likelihoods
In another implementation, the training module 316 models the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk by:
u
k
=Pr(pk presented)=r(s(v=[a1k·u′k(θ) . . . amk·u′km(θ)])), (16)
where elements ahk are 1 for the multiple MHC alleles h EH associated with peptide sequence pk, u′kh is an implicit per-allele presentation likelihood for MHC allele h, vector v is a vector in which element vh corresponds to ahk·u′kh, s(⋅) is a function mapping the elements of v, and r(⋅) is a clipping function that clips the value of the input into a given range. As described below in more detail, s(⋅) may be the summation function or the second-order function, but it is appreciated that in other embodiments, s(⋅) can be any function such as the maximum function. The values for the set of parameters θ for the implicit per-allele likelihoods can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θ, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles and/or cells expressing multiple MHC alleles.
The presentation likelihood in the presentation model of equation (17) is modeled as a function of implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods u′kh that each correspond to the likelihood peptide pk will be presented by an individual MHC allele h. The implicit per-allele likelihood is distinct from the per-allele presentation likelihood of section X.B in that the parameters for implicit per-allele likelihoods can be learned from multiple allele settings, in which direct association between a presented peptide and the corresponding MHC allele is unknown, in addition to single-allele settings. Thus, in a multiple-allele setting, the presentation model can estimate not only whether peptide pk will be presented by a set of MHC alleles H as a whole, but can also provide individual likelihoods u′kh∈H that indicate which MHC allele h most likely presented peptide pk. An advantage of this is that the presentation model can generate the implicit likelihoods without training data for cells expressing single MHC alleles.
In one particular implementation referred throughout the remainder of the specification, r(⊇) is a function having the range [0, 1]. For example, r(⋅) may be the clip function:
r(z)=min(max(z,0),1),
where the minimum value between z and 1 is chosen as the presentation likelihood uk. In another implementation, r(⋅) is the hyperbolic tangent function given by:
r(z)=tanh(z)
when the values for the domain z is equal to or greater than 0.
X.C.5. Example 3.2: Sum-of-Functions Model
In one particular implementation, s(⋅) is a summation function, and the presentation likelihood is given by summing the implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods:
In one implementation, the implicit per-allele presentation likelihood for MHC allele h is generated by:
u′
k
h=ƒ(gh(xhk;θh)) (18)
such that the presentation likelihood is estimated by:
According to equation (19), the presentation likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles H can be generated by applying the function gh(⋅) to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk for each of the MHC alleles H to generate the corresponding dependency score for allele interacting variables. Each dependency score is first transformed by the function ƒ(⋅) to generate implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods u′kh. The per-allele likelihoods u′kh are combined, and the clipping function may be applied to the combined likelihoods to clip the values into a range [0, 1] to generate the presentation likelihood that peptide sequence pk will be presented by the set of MHC alleles H. The dependency function gh may be in the form of any of the dependency functions gh introduced above in sections X.B.1.
As an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
=r(ƒ(x2k·θ2)+ƒ(x3k·θ3)),
where x2k, x3k are the identified allele-interacting variables for MHC alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2 θ3 are the set of parameters determined for MHC alleles h=2, h=3.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
=r(ƒ(NN2(x2k;θ2))+ƒ(NN3(x3k;θ3))),
where NN2(⋅), NN3(⋅) are the identified network models for MHC alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2, θ3 are the set of parameters determined for MHC alleles h=2, h=3.
In another implementation, when the predictions are made for the log of mass spectrometry ion currents, r(⋅) is the log function and ƒ(⋅) is the exponential function.
X.C.6. Example 3.3: Sum-of-Functions Models with Allele-Noninteracting Variables
In one implementation, the implicit per-allele presentation likelihood for MHC allele h is generated by:
u′
k
h=ƒ(gh(xhk;θh)+gw(wk;θw)), (20)
such that the presentation likelihood is generated by:
to incorporate the impact of allele noninteracting variables on peptide presentation.
According to equation (21), the presentation likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles H can be generated by applying the function gh(⋅) to the encoded version of the peptide sequence pk for each of the MHC alleles H to generate the corresponding dependency score for allele interacting variables for each MHC allele h. The function gw(⋅) for the allele noninteracting variables is also applied to the encoded version of the allele noninteracting variables to generate the dependency score for the allele noninteracting variables. The score for the allele noninteracting variables are combined to each of the dependency scores for the allele interacting variables. Each of the combined scores are transformed by the function ƒ(⋅) to generate the implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods. The implicit likelihoods are combined, and the clipping function may be applied to the combined outputs to clip the values into a range [0,1] to generate the presentation likelihood that peptide sequence pk will be presented by the MHC alleles H. The dependency function gw may be in the form of any of the dependency functions gw introduced above in sections X.B.3.
As an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
=r(ƒ(wk·θw+x2k·θ2)+ƒ(wk·θw+x3k·θ3)),
where wk are the identified allele-noninteracting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for the allele-noninteracting variables.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by MHC alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified MHC alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k
=r(ƒ(NNw(wk;θw)+NN2(x2k;θ2))+ƒ(NNw(wk;θw)+NN3(x3k;θ3)))
where wk are the identified allele-interacting variables for peptide pk, and θw are the set of parameters determined for allele-noninteracting variables.
In another implementation, the implicit per-allele presentation likelihood for MHC allele h is generated by:
u′
k
h=ƒ(gh([xhkwk];θh)) (22)
such that the presentation likelihood is generated by:
X.C.7. Example 4: Second Order Models
In one implementation, s(⊇) is a second-order function, and the estimated presentation likelihood uk for peptide pk is given by:
where elements u′kh are the implicit per-allele presentation likelihood for MHC allele h. The values for the set of parameters θ for the implicit per-allele likelihoods can be determined by minimizing the loss function with respect to θ, where i is each instance in the subset S of training data 170 generated from cells expressing single MHC alleles and/or cells expressing multiple MHC alleles. The implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods may be in any form shown in equations (18), (20), and (22) described above.
In one aspect, the model of equation (23) may imply that there exists a possibility peptide pk will be presented by two MHC alleles simultaneously, in which the presentation by two HLA alleles is statistically independent.
According to equation (23), the presentation likelihood that a peptide sequence pk will be presented by one or more MHC alleles H can be generated by combining the implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods and subtracting the likelihood that each pair of MHC alleles will simultaneously present the peptide pk from the summation to generate the presentation likelihood that peptide sequence pk will be presented by the MHC alleles H.
As an example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by HLA alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified HLA alleles using the affine transformation functions gh(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(x2k·θ2)+ƒ(x3k·θ3)−ƒ(x2k·θ2)·ƒ(x3k·θ3),
where x2k, x3k are the identified allele-interacting variables for HLA alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2, θ3 are the set of parameters determined for HLA alleles h=2, h=3.
As another example, the likelihood that peptide pk will be presented by HLA alleles h=2, h=3, among m=4 different identified HLA alleles using the network transformation functions gh(⋅), gw(⋅), can be generated by:
u
k=ƒ(NN2(x2k;·θ2))+ƒ(NN3(x3k;θ3))−ƒ(NN2(x2k;θ2))·ƒ(NN3(x3k;θ3)),
where NN2(⋅, NN3(⋅) are the identified network models for HLA alleles h=2, h=3, and θ2, θ3 are the set of parameters determined for HLA alleles h=2, h=3.
XI.A Example 5: Prediction Module
The prediction module 320 receives sequence data and selects candidate neoantigens in the sequence data using the presentation models. Specifically, the sequence data may be DNA sequences, RNA sequences, and/or protein sequences extracted from tumor tissue cells of patients. The prediction module 320 processes the sequence data into a plurality of peptide sequences pk having 8-15 amino acids for MHC-I or 6-30 amino acids for MHC-II. For example, the prediction module 320 may process the given sequence “IEFROEIFJEF” (SEQ ID NO: 76) into three peptide sequences having 9 amino acids “IEFROEIFJ,” (SEQ ID NO: 77), “EFROEIFJE,” (SEQ ID NO: 78), and “FROEIFJEF.” (SEQ ID NO: 79) In one embodiment, the prediction module 320 may identify candidate neoantigens that are mutated peptide sequences by comparing sequence data extracted from normal tissue cells of a patient with the sequence data extracted from tumor tissue cells of the patient to identify portions containing one or more mutations.
The presentation module 320 applies one or more of the presentation models to the processed peptide sequences to estimate presentation likelihoods of the peptide sequences. Specifically, the prediction module 320 may select one or more candidate neoantigen peptide sequences that are likely to be presented on tumor HLA molecules by applying the presentation models to the candidate neoantigens. In one implementation, the presentation module 320 selects candidate neoantigen sequences that have estimated presentation likelihoods above a predetermined threshold. In another implementation, the presentation model selects the N candidate neoantigen sequences that have the highest estimated presentation likelihoods (where N is generally the maximum number of epitopes that can be delivered in a vaccine). A vaccine including the selected candidate neoantigens for a given patient can be injected into the patient to induce immune responses.
XI.B. Example 6: Cassette Design Module
XI.B.1 Overview
The cassette design module 324 generates a vaccine cassette sequence based on the v selected candidate peptides for injection into a patient. Specifically, for a set of selected peptides pk, k=1, 2, . . . , v for inclusion in a vaccine of capacity v, the cassette sequence is given by concatenation of a series of therapeutic epitope sequences p′k, k=1, 2, . . . , v that each include the sequence of a corresponding peptide pk. In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 may concatenate the epitopes directly adjacent to one another. For example, a vaccine cassette C may be represented as:
C=[p′
t
p′
t
. . . p′
t
] (24)
where p′i denotes the i-th epitope of the cassette. Thus, t; corresponds to an index k=1, 2, . . . , v for the selected peptide at the i-th position of the cassette. In another embodiment, the cassette design module 324 may concatenate the epitopes with one or more optional linker sequences in between adjacent epitopes. For example, a vaccine cassette C may be represented as:
C=[p′
t
l
(t1,t2)
p′
t
l
(t2,t3)
. . . l
(t
,t
)
p′
t
] (25)
where l(ti,tj) denotes a linker sequence placed between the i-th epitope p′ti and the j=i+1-th epitope p′j=i+1 of the cassette. The cassette design module 324 determines which of the selected epitopes p′k, k=1, 2, . . . , v are arranged at the different positions of the cassette, as well as any linker sequences placed between the epitopes. A cassette sequence C can be loaded as a vaccine based on any of the methods described in the present specification.
In one embodiment, the set of therapeutic epitopes may be generated based on the selected peptides determined by the prediction module 320 associated with presentation likelihoods above a predetermined threshold, where the presentation likelihoods are determined by the presentation models. However it is appreciated that in other embodiments, the set of therapeutic epitopes may be generated based on any one or more of a number of methods (alone or in combination), for example, based on binding affinity or predicted binding affinity to HLA class I or class II alleles of the patient, binding stability or predicted binding stability to HLA class I or class II alleles of the patient, random sampling, and the like.
In one embodiment, the therapeutic epitopes p′k may correspond to the selected peptides pk themselves. In another embodiment, the therapeutic epitopes p′k may also include C- and/or N-terminal flanking sequences in addition to the selected peptides. For example, an epitope p′k included in the cassette may be represented as a sequence [nkpk ck] where ck is a C-terminal flanking sequence attached the C-terminus of the selected peptide pk, and nk is an N-terminal flanking sequence attached to the N-terminus of the selected peptide pk. In one instance referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the N- and C-terminal flanking sequences are the native N- and C-terminal flanking sequences of the therapeutic vaccine epitope in the context of its source protein. In one instance referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the therapeutic epitope p′k represents a fixed-length epitope. In another instance, the therapeutic epitope p′k can represent a variable-length epitope, in which the length of the epitope can be varied depending on, for example, the length of the C- or N-flanking sequence. For example, the C-terminal flanking sequence ck and the N-terminal flanking sequence nk can each have varying lengths of 2-5 residues, resulting in 16 possible choices for the epitope pk.
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 generates cassette sequences by taking into account presentation of junction epitopes that span the junction between a pair of therapeutic epitopes in the cassette. Junction epitopes are novel non-self but irrelevant epitope sequences that arise in the cassette due to the process of concatenating therapeutic epitopes and linker sequences in the cassette. The novel sequences of junction epitopes are different from the therapeutic epitopes of the cassette themselves. A junction epitope spanning epitopes p′ti and p′tj may include any epitope sequence that overlaps with both p′ti or p′tj that is different from the sequences of therapeutic epitopes p′ti and p′tj themselves. Specifically, each junction between epitope p′ti and an adjacent epitope p′tj of the cassette with or without an optional linker sequence l(ti,tj) may be associated with n(ti,tj) junction epitopes en(ti,tj), n=1, 2, . . . , n(ti,tj). The junction epitopes may be sequences that at least partially overlap with both epitopes p′ti and p′tj, or may be sequences that at least partially overlap with linker sequences placed between the epitopes p′ti and p′tj. Junction epitopes may be presented by MHC class I, MHC class II, or both.
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 generates a cassette sequence that reduces the likelihood that junction epitopes are presented in the patient. Specifically, when the cassette is injected into the patient, junction epitopes have the potential to be presented by HLA class I or HLA class II alleles of the patient, and stimulate a CD8 or CD4 T-cell response, respectively. Such reactions are often times undesirable because T-cells reactive to the junction epitopes have no therapeutic benefit, and may diminish the immune response to the selected therapeutic epitopes in the cassette by antigenic competition.76
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 iterates through one or more candidate cassettes, and determines a cassette sequence for which a presentation score of junction epitopes associated with that cassette sequence is below a numerical threshold. The junction epitope presentation score is a quantity associated with presentation likelihoods of the junction epitopes in the cassette, and a higher value of the junction epitope presentation score indicates a higher likelihood that junction epitopes of the cassette will be presented by HLA class I or HLA class II or both.
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 may determine a cassette sequence associated with the lowest junction epitope presentation score among the candidate cassette sequences. In one instance, the presentation score for a given cassette sequence C is determined based on a set of distance metrics d(en(ti,tj), n=1, 2, . . . , n(ti,tj))=d(ti,tj) each associated with a junction in the cassette C. Specifically, a distance metric d(ti,tj) specifies a likelihood that one or more of the junction epitopes spanning between the pair of adjacent therapeutic epitopes p′ti and p′tj will be presented. The junction epitope presentation score for cassette C can then be determined by applying a function (e.g., summation, statistical function) to the set of distance metrics for the cassette C. Mathematically, the presentation score is given by:
score=h(d(t
where h(⋅) is some function mapping the distance metrics of each junction to a score. In one particular instance referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the function h(⋅) is the summation across the distance metrics of the cassette.
The cassette design module 324 may iterate through one or more candidate cassette sequences, determine the junction epitope presentation score for the candidate cassettes, and identify an optimal cassette sequence associated with a junction epitope presentation score below the threshold. In one particular embodiment referred throughout the remainder of the specification, the distance metric d(⋅) for a given junction may be given by the sum of the presentation likelihoods or the expected number presented junction epitopes as determined by the presentation models described in sections VII and VIII of the specification. However, it is appreciated that in other embodiments, the distance metric may be derived from other factors alone or in combination with the models like the one exemplified above, where these other factors may include deriving the distance metric from any one or more of (alone or in combination): HLA binding affinity or stability measurements or predictions for HLA class I or HLA class II, and a presentation or immunogenicity model trained on HLA mass spectrometry or T-cell epitope data, for HLA class I or HLA class II. In one embodiment, the distance metric may combine information about HLA class I and HLA class II presentation. For example, the distance metric could be the number of junction epitopes predicted to bind any of the patient's HLA class I or HLA class II alleles with binding affinity below a threshold. In another example, the distance metric could be the expected number of epitopes predicted to be presented by any of the patient's HLA class I or HLA class II alleles.
The cassette design module 324 may further check the one or more candidate cassette sequences to identify if any of the junction epitopes in the candidate cassette sequences are self-epitopes for a given patient for whom the vaccine is being designed. To accomplish this, the cassette design module 324 checks the junction epitopes against a known database such as BLAST. In one embodiment, the cassette design module may be configured to design cassettes that avoid junction self-epitopes by setting the distance metric d(ti,tj) to a very large value (e.g., 100) for pairs of epitopes ti,tj where contatenating epitope ti to the N-terminus of epitope t; results in the formation of a junction self-epitope.
Returning to the example in
In some cases, the cassette design module 324 can perform a brute force approach and iterates through all or most possible candidate cassette sequences to select the sequence with the smallest junction epitope presentation score. However, the number of such candidate cassettes can be prohibitively large as the capacity of the vaccine v increases. For example, for a vaccine capacity of v=20 epitopes, the cassette design module 324 has to iterate through ˜1018 possible candidate cassettes to determine the cassette with the lowest junction epitope presentation score. This determination may be computationally burdensome (in terms of computational processing resources required), and sometimes intractable, for the cassette design module 324 to complete within a reasonable amount of time to generate the vaccine for the patient. Moreover, accounting for the possible junction epitopes for each candidate cassette can be even more burdensome. Thus, the cassette design module 324 may select a cassette sequence based on ways of iterating through a number of candidate cassette sequences that are significantly smaller than the number of candidate cassette sequences for the brute force approach.
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 generates a subset of randomly or at least pseudo-randomly generated candidate cassettes, and selects the candidate cassette associated with a junction epitope presentation score below a predetermined threshold as the cassette sequence. Additionally, the cassette design module 324 may select the candidate cassette from the subset with the lowest junction epitope presentation score as the cassette sequence. For example, the cassette design module 324 may generate a subset of ˜1 million candidate cassettes for a set of v=20 selected epitopes, and select the candidate cassette with the smallest junction epitope presentation score. Although generating a subset of random cassette sequences and selecting a cassette sequence with a low junction epitope presentation score out of the subset may be sub-optimal relative to the brute force approach, it requires significantly less computational resources thereby making its implementation technically feasible. Further, performing the brute force method as opposed to this more efficient technique may only result in a minor or even negligible improvement in junction epitope presentation score, thus making it not worthwhile from a resource allocation perspective.
In another embodiment, the cassette design module 324 determines an improved cassette configuration by formulating the epitope sequence for the cassette as an asymmetric traveling salesman problem (TSP). Given a list of nodes and distances between each pair of nodes, the TSP determines a sequence of nodes associated with the shortest total distance to visit each node exactly once and return to the original node. For example, given cities A, B, and C with known distances between each other, the solution of the TSP generates a closed sequence of cities, for which the total distance traveled to visit each city exactly once is the smallest among possible routes. The asymmetric version of the TSP determines the optimal sequence of nodes when the distance between a pair of nodes are asymmetric. For example, the “distance” for traveling from node A to node B may be different from the “distance” for traveling from node B to node A.
The cassette design module 324 determines an improved cassette sequence by solving an asymmetric TSP, in which each node corresponds to a therapeutic epitope p′k. The distance from a node corresponding to epitope p′k to another node corresponding to epitope p′m is given by the junction epitope distance metric d(k,m), while the distance from the node corresponding to the epitope p′m to the node corresponding to epitope p′k is given by the distance metric d(m,k) that may be different from the distance metric d(k,m). By solving for an improved optimal cassette using an asymmetric TSP, the cassette design module 324 can find a cassette sequence that results in a reduced presentation score across the junctions between epitopes of the cassette. The solution of the asymmetric TSP indicates a sequence of therapeutic epitopes that correspond to the order in which the epitopes should be concatenated in a cassette to minimize the junction epitope presentation score across the junctions of the cassette. Specifically, given the set of therapeutic epitopes k=1, 2, . . . , v, the cassette design module 324 determines the distance metrics d(k,m), k,m=1, 2, . . . , v for each possible ordered pair of therapeutic epitopes in the cassette. In other words, for a given pair k, m of epitopes, both the distance metric d(k,m) for concatenating therapeutic epitope p′m after epitope p′k and the distance metric d(m,k) for concatenating therapeutic epitope p′k after epitope p′m is determined, since these distance metrics may be different from each other.
In one embodiment, the cassette design module 324 solves the asymmetric TSP through an integer linear programming problem. Specifically, the cassette design module 324 generates a (v+1)×(v+1) path matrix P given by the following:
The v×v matrix D is an asymmetric distance matrix, where each element D(k, m), k=1, 2, . . . , v; m=1, 2, . . . , v corresponds to the distance metric for a junction from epitope p′k to epitope p′m. Rows k=2, . . . , v of P correspond to nodes of the original epitopes, while row 1 and column 1 corresponds to a “ghost node” that is at zero distance from all other nodes. The addition of the “ghost node” to the matrix encodes the notion that the vaccine cassette is linear rather than circular, so there is no junction between the first and last epitopes. In other words, the sequence is not circular, and the first epitope is not assumed to be concatenated after the last epitope in the sequence. Let xkm denote a binary variable whose value is 1 if there is a directed path (i.e., an epitope-epitope junction in the cassette) where epitope p′k is concatenated to the N-terminus of epitope p′m and 0 otherwise. In addition, let E denote the set of all v therapeutic vaccine epitopes, and let S⊂E denote a subset of epitopes. For any such subset S, let out(S) denote the number of epitope-epitope junctions xkm=1 where k is an epitope in S and m is an epitope in E\S. Given a known path matrix P, the cassette design module 324 finds a path matrix X that solves the following integer linear programming problem:
in which Pkm denotes element P(k,m) of the path matrix P, subject to the following constraints:
The first two constraints guarantee that each epitope appears exactly once in the cassette. The last constraint ensures that the cassette is connected. In other words, the cassette encoded by x is a connected linear protein sequence.
The solutions for xkm, k,m=1, 2, . . . , v+1 in the integer linear programming problem of equation (27) indicates the closed sequence of nodes and ghost nodes that can be used to infer one or more sequences of therapeutic epitopes for the cassette that lower the presentation score of junction epitopes. Specifically, a value of xkm=1 indicates that a “path” exists from node k to node m, or in other words, that therapeutic epitope p′m should be concatenated after therapeutic epitope p′k in the improved cassette sequence. A solution of xkm=0 indicates that no such path exists, or in other words, that therapeutic epitope p′m should not be concatenated after therapeutic epitope p′k in the improved cassette sequence. Collectively, the values of xkm in the integer programming problem of equation (27) represent a sequence of nodes and the ghost node, in which the path enters and exists each node exactly once. For example, the values of xghost,1=1, x13=1, x32=1, and x2,ghost=1 (0 otherwise) may indicate a sequence ghost→1→3→2→ghost of nodes and ghost nodes.
Once the sequence has been solved for, the ghost nodes are deleted from the sequence to generate a refined sequence with only the original nodes corresponding to therapeutic epitopes in the cassette. The refined sequence indicates the order in which selected epitopes should be concatenated in the cassette to improve the presentation score. For example, continuing from the example in the previous paragraph, the ghost node may be deleted to generate a refined sequence 1→3→2. The refined sequence indicates one possible way to concatenate epitopes in the cassette, namely p1→p3→p2.
In one embodiment, when the therapeutic epitopes p′k are variable-length epitopes, the cassette design module 324 determines candidate distance metrics corresponding to different lengths of the therapeutic epitopes p′k and p′m, and identifies the distance metric d(k,m) as the smallest candidate distance metric. For example, epitopes p′k=[nk pk ck] and p′m=[nm pm cm] may each include a corresponding N- and C-terminal flanking sequence that can vary from (in one embodiment) 2-5 amino acids. Thus, the junction between epitopes p′k and p′m is associated with 16 different sets of junction epitopes based on the 4 possible length values of nk and the 4 possible length values of cm that are placed in the junction. The cassette design module 324 may determine candidate distance metrics for each set of junction epitopes, and determine the distance metric d(k,m) as the smallest value. The cassette design module 324 can then construct the path matrix P and solve for the integer linear programming problem in equation (27) to determine the cassette sequence.
Compared to the random sampling approach, solving for the cassette sequence using the integer programming problem requires determination of v×(v−1) distance metrics each corresponding to a pair of therapeutic epitopes in the vaccine. A cassette sequence determined through this approach can result in a sequence with significantly less presentation of junction epitopes while potentially requiring significantly less computational resources than the random sampling approach, especially when the number of generated candidate cassette sequences is large.
XI.B.2. Comparison of Junction Epitope Presentation for Cassette Sequences Generated by Random Sampling vs. Asymmetric TSP
Two cassette sequences including v=20 therapeutic epitopes were generated by random sampling 1,000,000 permutations (cassette sequence C1), and by solving the integer linear programming problem in equation (27) (cassette sequence C2). The distance metrics, and thus, the presentation score was determined based on the presentation model described in equation (14), in which ƒ is the sigmoid function, xhi is the sequence of peptide pi, gh(⋅) is the neural network function, w includes the flanking sequence, the log transcripts per kilobase million (TPM) of peptide pi, the antigenicity of the protein of peptide pi, and the sample ID of origin of peptide pi, and gw(⋅) of the flanking sequence and the log TPM are neural network functions, respectively. Each of the neural network functions for gh(⋅) included one output node of a one-hidden-layer multilayer perceptron (MLP) with input dimensions 231 (11 residues×21 characters per residue, including pad characters), width 256, rectified linear unit (ReLU) activations in the hidden layer, linear activations in the output layer, and one output node per HLA allele in the training data set. The neural network function for the flanking sequence was a one hidden-layer MLP with input dimension 210 (5 residues of N-terminal flanking sequence+5 residues of C-terminal flanking sequence×21 characters per residue, including the pad characters), width 32, ReLU activations in the hidden layer and linear activation in the output layer. The neural network function for the RNA log TPM was a one hidden layer MLP with input dimension 1, width 16, ReLU activations in the hidden layer and linear activation in the output layer. The presentation models were constructed for HLA alleles HLA-A*02:04, HLA-A*02:07, HLA-B*40:01, HLA-B*40:02, HLA-C*16:02, and HLA-C*16:04. The presentation score indicating the expected number of presented junction epitopes of the two cassette sequences were compared. Results showed that the presentation score for the cassette sequence generated by solving the equation of (27) was associated with a ˜4 fold improvement over the presentation score for the cassette sequence generated by random sampling.
Specifically, the v=20 epitopes were given by:
In the first example, 1,000,000 different candidate cassette sequences were randomly generated with the 20 therapeutic epitopes. The presentation score was generated for each of the candidate cassette sequences. The candidate cassette sequence identified to have the lowest presentation score was:
with a presentation score of 6.1 expected number of presented junction epitopes. The median presentation score of the 1,000,000 random sequences was 18.3. The experiment shows that the expected number of presented junction epitopes can be significantly reduced by identifying a cassette sequence among randomly sampled cassettes.
In the second example, a cassette sequence C2 was identified by solving the integer linear programming problem in equation (27). Specifically, the distance metric of each potential junction between a pair of therapeutic epitopes was determined. The distance metrics were used to solve for the solution to the integer programming problem. The cassette sequence identified by this approach was:
with a presentation score of 1.7. The presentation score of cassette sequence C2 showed a ˜4 fold improvement over the presentation score of cassette sequence C1, and a ˜11 fold improvement over the median presentation score of the 1,000,000 randomly generated candidate cassettes. The run-time for generating cassette C1 was 20 seconds on a single thread of a 2.30 GHz Intel Xeon E5-2650 CPU. The run-time for generating cassette C2 was 1 second on a single thread of the same CPU. Thus in this example, the cassette sequence identified by solving the integer programming problem of equation (27) produces a ˜4-fold better solution at 20-fold reduced computational cost.
The results show that the integer programming problem can potentially provide a cassette sequence with a lower number of presented junction epitopes than one identified from random sampling, potentially with less computation resources.
XI.B.3. Comparison of Junction Epitope Presentation for Cassette Sequence Selection Generated by MHCflurry and the Presentation Model
In this example, cassette sequences including v=20 therapeutic epitopes were selected based off tumor/normal exome sequencing, tumor transcriptome sequencing and HLA typing of a lung cancer sample were generated by random sampling 1,000,000 permutations, and b y solving the integer linear programming problem in equation (27). The distance metrics, and thus, the presentation score were determined based on the number of junction epitopes predicted by MHCflurry, an HLA-peptide binding affinity predictor, to bind the patient's HLAs with affinity below a variety of thresholds (e.g., 50-1000 nM, or higher, or lower). In this example, the 20 nonsynoymous somatic mutations chosen as therapeutic epitopes were selected from among the 98 somatic mutations identified in the tumor sample by ranking the mutations according to the presentation model in Section XI.B above. However, it is appreciated that in other embodiments, the therapeutic epitopes may be selected based on other criteria; such as those based stability, or combinations of criteria such as presentation score, affinity, and so on. In addition, it is appreciated that the criteria used for prioritizing therapeutic epitopes for inclusion in the vaccine need not be the same as the criteria used for determining the distance metric D(k, m) used in the cassette design module 324.
The patient's HLA class I alleles were HLA-A*01:01, HLA-A*03:01, HLA-B*07:0 2, HLA-B*35:03, HLA-C*07:02, HLA-C*14:02.
Specifically in this example, the v=20 therapeutic epitopes were
Results from this example in the table below compare the number of junction epitopes predicted by MHCflurry to bind the patient's HLAs with affinity below the value in the threshold column (where nM stands for nanoMolar) as found via three example methods. For the first method, the optimal cassette found via the traveling salesman problem (ATSP) formulation described above with is run-time. For the second method, the optimal cassette as determined by taking the best cassette found after 1 million random samples. For the third method, the median number of junction epitopes was found in the 1 million random samples.
The results of this example illustrate that any one of a number of criteria may be used to identify whether or not a given cassette design meets design requirements. Specifically, as demonstrated by prior examples, the selected cassette sequence out of many candidates may be specified by the cassette sequence having a lowest junction epitope presentation score, or at least such a score below an identified threshold. This example represents that another criteria, such as binding affinity, may be used to specify whether or not a given cassette design meets design requirements. For this criteria, a threshold binding affinity (e.g., 50-1000, or greater or lower) may be set specifying that the cassette design sequence should have fewer than some threshold number of junction epitopes above the threshold (e.g., 0), and any one of a number of methods may be used (e.g., methods one through three illustrated in the table) can be used to identify if a given candidate cassette sequence meets those requirements. These example methods further illustrate that depending on the method used, the thresholds may need to be set differently. Other criteria may be envisioned, such as those based stability, or combinations of criteria such as presentation score, affinity, and so on.
In another example, the same cassettes were generated using the same HLA type and 20 therapeutic epitopes from earlier in this section (XI.C), but instead of using distance metrics based off binding affinity prediction, the distance metric for epitopes m, k was the number of peptides spanning the m to k junction predicted to be presented by the patient's HLA class I alleles with probability of presentation above a series of thresholds (between probability of 0.005 and 0.5, or higher, or lower), where the probabilities of presentation were determined by the presentation model in Section XI.B above. This example further illustrates the breadth of criteria that may be considered in identifying whether a given candidate cassette sequence meets design requirements for use in the vaccine.
The examples above have identified that the criteria for determining whether a candidate cassette sequence may vary by implementation. Each of these examples has illustrated that the count of the number of junction epitopes falling above or below the criteria may be a count used in determining whether the candidate cassette sequence meets that criteria. For example, if the criteria is number of epitopes meeting or exceeding a threshold binding affinity for HLA, whether the candidate cassette sequence has greater or fewer than that number may determine whether the candidate cassette sequence meets the criteria for use as the selected cassette for the vaccine. Similarly if the criteria is the number of junction epitopes exceeding a threshold presentation likelihood.
However, in other embodiments, calculations other than counting can be performed to determine whether a candidate cassette sequence meets the design criteria. For example, rather than the count of epitopes exceeding/falling below some threshold, it may instead be determined what proportion of junction epitopes exceed or fall below the threshold, for example whether the top X % of junction epitopes have a presentation likelihood above some threshold Y, or whether X % percent of junction epitopes have an HLA binding affinity less than or greater than Z nM. These are merely examples, generally the criteria may be based on any attribute of either individual junction epitopes, or statistics derived from aggregations of some or all of the junction epitopes. Here, X can generally be any number between 0 and 100% (e.g., 75% or less) and Y can be any value between 0 and 1, and Z can be any number suitable to the criteria in question. These values may be determined empirically, and depend on the models and criteria used, as well as the quality of the training data used.
As such, in certain aspects, junction epitopes with high probabilities of presentation can be removed; junction epitopes with low probabilities of presentation can be retained; junction epitopes that bind tightly, i.e., junction epitopes with binding affinity below 1000 nM or 500 nM or some other threshold can be removed; and/or junction epitopes that bind weakly, i.e., junction epitopes with binding affinity above 1000 nM or 500 nM or some other threshold can be retained.
Although the examples above have identified candidate sequences using an implementation of the presentation model described above, these principles apply equally to an implementation where the epitopes for arrangement in the cassette sequences are identified based on other types of models as well, such as those based on affinity, stability, and so on.
XII. Example 7: Experimentation Results Showing Example Presentation Model Performance
The validity of the various presentation models described above were tested on test data T that were subsets of training data 170 that were not used to train the presentation models or a separate dataset from the training data 170 that have similar variables and data structures as the training data 170.
A relevant metric indicative of the performance of a presentation models is:
that indicates the ratio of the number of peptide instances that were correctly predicted to be presented on associated HLA alleles to the number of peptide instances that were predicted to be presented on the HLA alleles. In one implementation, a pi in the test data T was predicted to be presented on one or more associated HLA alleles if the corresponding likelihood estimate u; is greater or equal to a given threshold value t. Another relevant metric indicative of the performance of presentation models is:
that indicates the ratio of the number of peptide instances that were correctly predicted to be presented on associated HLA alleles to the number of peptide instances that were known to be presented on the HLA alleles. Another relevant metric indicative of the performance of presentation models is the area-under-curve (AUC) of the receiver operating characteristic (ROC). The ROC plots the recall against the false positive rate (FPR), which is given by:
XII.A. Comparison of Presentation Model Performance on Mass Spectrometry Data Against State-of-the-Art Model
Specifically, the example presentation model shown in
The model shown in
As shown in the results of
These results demonstrate that the example presentation model had significantly better performance than the state-of-the-art models that predict peptide presentation based on MHC binding affinity or MHC binding stability predictions even though the example presentation model was not trained based on protein sequences that contained presented peptides.
XII.B. Comparison of Presentation Model Performance on T-Cell Epitope Data Against State-of-the-Art Models
Specifically, the example presentation model shown in
Each of the models were applied to the test data that is a subset of mass spectrometry data on HLA-A*02:01 T-cell epitope data (data set “D4”) (data can be found at www.iedb.org/doc/tcell_full_v3.zip). The model shown in
As shown in the results of
These results demonstrated that the example presentation model trained on mass spectrometry data performed significantly better than state-of-the-art models on predicting epitopes that were recognized by T-cells.
XII.C. Comparison of Different Presentation Model Performances on Mass Spectrometry Data
Specifically, the example presentation model labeled as “sigmoid-of-sums” in
As shown in
As discussed previously in section X.C.4., the results showed that the presentation models “sum-of-sigmoids,” “hyperbolic tangent,” and “second order” have high values of PPV compared to the “sigmoid-of-sums” model because the models correctly account for how peptides are presented independently by each MHC allele in a multiple-allele setting.
XII.D. Comparison of Presentation Model Performance with and without Training on Single-Allele Mass Spectrometry Data
The example model “with A2/B7 single-allele data” was the “sum-of-sigmoids” presentation model in equation (19) with a network dependency function gh(⋅), the expit function ƒ(⋅), and the identity function r(⋅). The model was trained based on a subset of data set D3 and single-allele mass spectrometry data for a variety of MHC alleles from the IEDB database (data can be found at: http://www.iedb.org/doc/mhc_ligand_full.zip). The example model “without A2/B7 single-allele data” was the same model, but trained based on a subset of the multiple-allele D3 data set without single-allele mass spectrometry data for alleles HLA-A*02:01 and HLA-B*07:02, but with single-allele mass spectrometry data for other alleles. Within the multiple-allele training data, cell line HCC1937 expressed HLA-B*07:02 but not HLA-A*02:01, and cell line HCT116 expressed HLA-A*02:01 but not HLA-B*07:02. The example presentation models were applied to a test data that was a random subset of data set D3 and did not overlap with the training data.
As shown in
These results indicate that the implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods of the presentation model can correctly predict and distinguish binding motifs to individual MHC alleles, even though direct association between the peptides and each individual MHC allele was not known in the training data.
XII.E. Comparison of Per-Allele Prediction Performance without Training on Single-Allele Mass Spectrometry Data
The column “Correlation” refers to the correlation between the actual labels that indicate whether the peptide was presented on the corresponding allele in the test data, and the label for prediction. As shown in
As shown in
XII.F. Frequently Occurring Anchor Residues in Per-Allele Predictions Match Known Canonical Anchor Motifs
As shown in
XII.G. Comparison of Presentation Model Performances with and Withtout Allele Noninteracting Variables
The example “allele-interacting” model was the sum-of-functions model using the form of implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods in equation (22) that incorporated C- and N-terminal flanking sequences as allele-interacting variables, with a network dependency function gh(⋅) and the expit function ƒ(⋅). The example “allele-noninteracting” model was the sum-of-functions model shown in equation (21) that incorporated C- and N-terminal flanking sequences as allele-noninteracting variables, with a network dependency function gh(⋅) and the expit function ƒ(⋅). The allele-noninteracting variables were modeled through a separate network dependency function gw(⋅). Both models were trained on a subset of data set D3 and single-allele mass spectrometry data for a variety of MHC alleles from the IEDB database (data can be found at: http://www.iedb.org/doc/mhc_ligand_full.zip). Each of the presentation models was applied to a test data set that is a random subset of data set D3 that did not overlap with the training data.
As shown in
XII.H. Dependency Between Presented Peptides and mRNA Quantification
Specifically, the horizontal axis in
The results indicate that the performance of the presentation model can be greatly improved by incorporating mRNA quantification measurements, as these measurements are strongly predictive of peptide presentation.
XII.I. Comparison of Presentation Model Performance with Incorporation of RNA Quantification Data
“MHCflurry+RNA filter” was a model similar to the current state-of-the-art model that predicts peptide presentation based on affinity predictions. It was implemented using MHCflurry along with a standard gene expression filter that removed all peptides from proteins with mRNA quantification measurements that were less than 3.2 FPKM. Implementation of MHCflurry is provided in detail at https://github.com/hammerlab/mhcflurry/, and at http://biorxiv.org/content/early/2016/05/22/054775. The “Example Model, no RNA” model was the “sum-of-sigmoids” example presentation model shown in equation (21) with the network dependency function gh(⋅), the network dependency function gw(⋅), and the expit function ƒ(⋅). The “Example Model, no RNA” model incorporated C-terminal flanking sequences as allele-noninteracting variables through a network dependency function gw(⋅).
The “Example Model, with RNA” model was the “sum-of-sigmoids” presentation model shown in equation (19) with network dependency function gh(⋅), the network dependency function gw(⋅) in equation (10) incorporating mRNA quantification data through a log function, and the expit function ƒ(⋅). The “Example Model, with RNA” model incorporated C-terminal flanking sequences as allele-noninteracting variables through the network dependency functions gw(⋅) and incorporated mRNA quantification measurements through the log function.
Each model was trained on a combination of the single-allele mass spectrometry data from the IEDB data set, 7 cell lines from the multiple-allele mass spectrometry data from the Bassani-Sternberg data set, and 20 mass spectrometry tumor samples. Each model was applied to a test set including 5,000 held-out proteins from 7 tumor samples that constituted 9,830 presented peptides from a total of 52,156,840 peptides.
As shown in the first two bar graphs of
Thus, results indicate that as expected from the findings in
XII.J. Example of Parameters Determined for MHC Allele HLA-C*16:04
The horizontal axis denoted samples of peptides with lengths 8, 9, 10, and 11. The vertical axis denoted the probability of peptide presentation conditioned on the lengths of the peptide. The plot “Truth (Blind Test Data)” showed the proportion of presented peptides according to the length of the peptide in a sample test data set. The presentation likelihood varied with the length of the peptide. For example, as shown in
Thus, the results showed that the example presentation models as presented herein generated improved predictions not only for 9mer peptides, but also for peptides of other lengths between 8-15, which account for up to 40% of the presented peptides in HLA class I alleles.
XII.K. Example of Parameters Determined for MHC Allele HLA-C*16:04
The following shows a set of parameters determined for a variation of the per-allele presentation model (equation (2)) for MHC allele HLA-C*16:04 denoted by h:
u
k=expit(relu(xhk·Wh1+bh1)−Wh2+bh2),
where relu(⋅) is the rectified linear unit (RELU) function, and Wh1a, bh1, Wh2, and bh2 are the set of parameters θ determined for the model. The allele interacting variables xhk consist of peptide sequences. The dimensions of Wh1 are (231×256), the dimensions of bh1 (1×256), the dimensions of Wh2 are (256×1), and bh2 is a scalar. For demonstration purposes, values for bh1, bh2, Wh1, and Wh2 are described in detail in PCT publication WO2017106638, herein incorporated by reference for all that it teaches.
XII.L. MHC II Example 1
Methods for determining MHC class II neoantigens are described in more detail in international application PCT/US2018/028438, herein incorporated by reference for all that it teaches.
Specifically, the horizontal axis in
The results indicate that the performance of the presentation model can be greatly improved by incorporating mRNA quantification measurements, as these measurements are strongly predictive of peptide presentation.
Peptide sequences of lengths 9-20 were considered for this experiment. The data was split into training, validation, and testing sets. Blocks of peptides of 50 residue blocks from both Dataset 1 and Dataset 2 were assigned to training and testing sets. Peptides that were duplicated anywhere in the proteome were removed, ensuring that no peptide sequence appeared both in the training and testing set. The prevalence of peptide presentation in the training and testing set was increased by 50 times by removing non-presented peptides. This is because Dataset 1 and Dataset 2 are from human tumor samples in which only a fraction of the cells are class II HLA alleles, resulting in peptide yields that were roughly 10 times lower than in pure samples of class II HLA alleles, which is still an underestimate due to imperfect mass spectrometry sensitivity. The training set contained 1,064 presented and 3,810,070 non-presented peptides. The test set contained 314 presented and 807,400 non-presented peptides.
Example model 1 was the sum-of-functions model in equation (22) using a network dependency function gh(⋅), the expit function ƒ(⋅), and the identity function r(⋅). The network dependency function gh(⋅) was structured as a multi-layer perceptron (MLP) with 256 hidden nodes and rectified linear unit (ReLU) activations. In addition to the peptide sequence, the allele interacting variables w contained the one-hot encoded C-terminal and N-terminal flanking sequence, a categorical variable indicating index of source gene G=gene(pi) of peptide pi, and a variable indicating mRNA quantification measurement. Example model 2 was identical to example model 1, except that the C-terminal and N-terminal flanking sequence was omitted from the allele interacting variables. Example model 3 was identical to example model 1, except that the index of source gene was omitted from the allele interacting variables. Example model 4 was identical to example model 1, except that the mRNA quantification measurement was omitted from the allele interacting variables.
Example model 5 was the sum-of-functions model in equation (20) with a network dependency function gh(⋅), the expit function ƒ(⋅), the identity function r(˜), and the dependency function gw(⋅) of equation (12). The dependency function gw(⋅) also included a network model taking mRNA quantification measurement as input, structured as a MLP with 16 hidden nodes and ReLU activations, and a network model taking C-flanking sequence as input, structured as a MLP with 32 hidden nodes and ReLU activations. The network dependency function gh(⋅) was structured as a multi-layer perceptron with 256 hidden nodes and rectified linear unit (ReLU) activations. Example model 6 was identical to example model 5, except that the network model for C-terminal and N-terminal flanking sequence was omitted. Example model 7 was identical to example model 5, except that the index of source gene was omitted from the allele noninteracting variables. Example model 8 was identical to example model 5, except that the network model for mRNA quantification measurement was omitted.
The prevalence of presented peptides in the test set was approximately 1/2400, and therefore, the PPV of a random prediction would also be approximately 1/2400=0.00042. As shown in
XII.M. MHC II Example 2
As noted above, each sample of the 39 samples of
While this particular experiment was performed using samples comprising HLA-DR molecules, and particularly HLA-DRB1 molecules, HLA-DRB3 molecules, HLA-DRB4 molecules, and HLA-DRB5 molecules, in alternative embodiments, this experiment can be performed using samples comprising one or more of any type(s) of HLA class II molecules. For example, in alterative embodiments, identical experiments can be performed using samples comprising HLA-DP and/or HLA-DQ molecules. This ability to model any type(s) of MHC class II molecules using the same techniques, and still achieve reliable results, is well known by those skilled in the art. For instance, Jensen, Kamilla Kjaergaard, et al.76 is one example of a recent scientific paper that uses identical methods for modeling binding affinity for HLA-DR molecules as well as for HLA-DQ and HLA-DP molecules. Therefore, one skilled in the art would understand that the experiments and models described herein can be used to separately or simultaneously model not only HLA-DR molecules, but any other MHC class II molecule, while still producing reliable results.
To sequence the peptides of each sample of the 39 total samples, mass spectrometry was performed for each sample. The resulting mass spectrum for the sample was then searched with Comet and scored with Percolator to sequence the peptides. Then, the quantity of peptides sequenced in the sample was identified for a plurality of different Percolator q-value thresholds. Specifically, for the sample, the quantity of peptides sequenced with a Percolator q-value of less than 0.01, with a Percolator q-value of less than 0.05, and with a Percolator q-value of less than 0.2 were determined.
For each sample of the 39 samples, the quantity of peptides sequenced at each of the different Percolator q-value thresholds is depicted in
Overall,
As discussed above with regard to
As noted above, MHC class II molecules typically present peptides with lengths of between 9-20 amino acids. Accordingly,
Based on the data depicted in
As depicted in
The model architecture of each example presentation model of the five example presentations models used to generate the ROC curves of the line graph of
Prior to using the example models to predict the likelihood that the peptides in a testing dataset of peptides will be presented by a MHC class II molecule, the example models were trained and validated. To train, validate, and finally test the example models, the data described above for the 39 samples was split into training, validation, and testing datasets.
To ensure that no peptides appeared in more than one of the training, validation, and testing datasets, the following procedure was performed. First all peptides from the 39 total samples that appeared in more than one location in the proteome were removed. Then, the peptides from the 39 total samples were partitioned into blocks of 10 adjacent peptides. Each block of the peptides from the 39 total samples was assigned uniquely to the training dataset, the validation dataset, or the testing dataset. In this way, no peptide appeared in more than one dataset of the training, validation, and testing datasets.
Out of the 28,081,944 peptides in the 39 total samples, the training dataset comprised 21,077 peptides presented by MHC class II molecules from 38 of the 39 total samples. The 21,077 peptides included in the training dataset were between lengths of 9 and 20 amino acids, inclusive. The example models used to generate the ROC curves in
The validation dataset consisted of 2,346 peptides presented by MHC class II molecules from the same 38 samples used in the training dataset. The validation set was used only for early stopping.
The testing dataset comprised peptides presented by MHC class II molecules that were identified from a tumor sample using mass spectrometry. Specifically, the testing dataset comprised 203 peptides presented by MHC class II molecules-specifically HLA-DRB1*07:01, HLA-DRB1*15:01, HLA-DRB4*01:03, and HLA-DRB5*01:01 molecules—that were identified from the tumor sample. The peptides included in the testing dataset were held out of the training dataset described above.
As noted above,
The performance of each of these five example models is depicted in the line graph of
As noted above, the performance of a model at predicting the likelihood that a peptide will be presented by a MHC class II molecule is quantified by identifying an AUC for a ROC curve that depicts a ratio of a true positive rate to a false positive rate for each prediction made by the model. A model with a greater AUC has a higher performance (i.e., greater accuracy) relative to a model with a lesser AUC. As shown in
The first model tested in
The second model tested in
The third model tested in
The fourth and final model tested in
Prior to using each of the four models of
The performance of each of the four models is depicted in the line graph in
As noted above, the performance of a model at predicting the likelihood that a peptide will be presented by a MHC class II molecule is quantified by identifying an AUC for a ROC curve that depicts a ratio of a true positive rate to a false positive rate for each prediction made by the model. A model with a greater AUC has a higher performance (i.e., greater accuracy) relative to a model with a lesser AUC. As shown in
The best-in-class prior art model used as example model 1 and example model 2 in
As noted above, the NetMHCII 2.3 model was tested according to two different criteria. Specifically, example model 1 model generated predictions of peptide presentation likelihood according to minimum NetMHCII 2.3 predicted binding affinity, and example model 2 generated predictions of peptide presentation likelihood according to minimum NetMHCII 2.3 predicted binding rank.
The presentation model used as example model 3 and example model 4 is an embodiment of the presentation model disclosed herein that is trained using data obtained via mass spectrometry. As noted above, the presentation model generated predictions of peptide presentation likelihood based on two different sets of allele interacting and allele non-interacting variables. Specifically, example model 4 generated predictions of peptide presentation likelihood based on MHC class II molecule type and peptide sequence (the same variable used by the NetMHCII 2.3 model), and example model 3 generated predictions of peptide presentation likelihood based on MHC class II molecule type, peptide sequence, RNA expression, gene identifier, and flanking sequence.
Prior using the example models of
Following the training and validation of the models, each of the models was tested using a testing dataset. As noted above, the NetMHCII 2.3 model is trained on a dataset comprising almost exclusively 15-mer peptides, meaning that NetMHCII 3.2 does not have the ability to give different priority to peptides of different weights, thereby reducing the predictive performance for NetMHCII 3.2 on HLA class II presentation mass spectrometry data containing peptides of all lengths. Therefore, to provide a fair comparison between the models not affected by variable peptide length, the testing dataset included exclusively 15-mer peptides. Specifically, the testing dataset comprised 933 15-mer peptides. 40 of the 933 peptides in the testing dataset were presented by MHC class II molecules-specifically by HLA-DRB1*07:01, HLA-DRB1*15:01, HLA-DRB4*01:03, and HLA-DRB5*01:01 molecules. The peptides included in the testing dataset were held out of the training datasets described above.
To test the example models using the testing dataset, for each of the example models, for each peptide of the 933 peptides in the testing dataset, the model generated a prediction of presentation likelihood for the peptide. Specifically, for each peptide in the testing dataset, the example 1 model generated a presentation score for the peptide by the MHC class II molecules using MHC class II molecule types and peptide sequence, by ranking the peptide by the minimum NetMHCII 2.3 predicted binding affinity across the four HLA class II DR alleles in the testing dataset. Similarly, for each peptide in the testing dataset, the example 2 model generated a presentation score for the peptide by the MHC class II molecules using MHC class II molecule types and peptide sequence, by ranking the peptide by the minimum NetMHCII 2.3 predicted binding rank (i.e., quantile normalized binding affinity) across the four HLA class II DR alleles in the testing dataset. For each peptide in the testing dataset, the example 4 model generated a presentation likelihood for the peptide by the MHC class II molecules based on MHC class II molecule type and peptide sequence. Similarly, for each peptide in the testing dataset, the example model 3 generated a presentation likelihood for the peptide by the MHC class II molecules based on MHC class II molecule types, peptide sequence, RNA expression, gene identifier, and flanking sequence.
The performance of each of the four example models is depicted in the line graph in
As noted above, the performance of a model at predicting the likelihood that a peptide will be presented by a MHC class II molecule is quantified by identifying an AUC for a ROC curve that depicts a ratio of a true positive rate to a false positive rate for each prediction made by the model. A model with a greater AUC has a higher performance (i.e., greater accuracy) relative to a model with a lesser AUC. As shown in
As shown in
Even further, as discussed above, the NetMHCII 2.3 model is trained on a training dataset that comprises almost exclusively 15-mer peptides. As a result, the NetMHCII 2.3 model is not trained to learn which peptides lengths are more likely to be presented by MHC class II molecules. Therefore, the NetMHCII 2.3 model does not weight its predictions of likelihood of peptide presentation by MHC class II molecules according to the length of the peptide. In other words, the NetMHCII 2.3 model does not modify its predictions of likelihood of peptide presentation by MHC class II molecules for peptides that have lengths outside of the modal peptide length of 15 amino acids. As a result, the NetMHCII 2.3 model overpredicts the likelihood of presentation of peptides with lengths greater or less than 15 amino acids.
On the other hand, the presentation models disclosed herein are trained using peptide data obtained via mass spectrometry, and therefore can be trained on training dataset that comprise peptides of all different lengths. As a result, the presentation models disclosed herein are able to learn which peptides lengths are more likely to be presented by MHC class II molecules. Therefore, the presentation models disclosed herein can weight predictions of likelihood of peptide presentation by MHC class II molecules according to the length of the peptide. In other words, the presentation models disclosed herein are able to modify their predictions of likelihood of peptide presentation by MHC class II molecules for peptides that have lengths outside of the modal peptide length of 15 amino acids. As a result, the presentation models disclosed herein are capable of achieving significantly more accurate presentation predictions for peptides of lengths greater than or less than 15 amino acids, than the current best-in-class prior art model, the NetMHCII 2.3 model. This is one advantage of using the presentation models disclosed herein to predict likelihood of peptide presentation by MHC class II molecules.
XII.N. Example of Parameters Determined for MHC II Alleles
The following shows a set of parameters determined for a variation of the multi-allele presentation model (equation (16)) generating implicit per-allele presentation likelihoods for class II MHC alleles HLA-DRB1*12:01 and HLA-DRB1*10:01:
u=expit(relu(X·W1+b1)·W2+b2),
where relu(⋅) is the rectified linear unit (RELU) function, W1, b1, W2, and b2 are the set of parameters θ determined for the model. The allele-interacting variables X are contained in a 1×399) matrix consisting of 1 row of one-hot encoded and middle-padded peptide sequences per input peptide. The dimensions of W1 are (399×256), the dimensions of b1 (1×256), the dimensions of W2 are (256×2), and b2 are (1×2). The first column of the output indicates the implicit per-allele probability of presentation for the peptide sequence by the allele HLA-DRB1*12:01, and the second column of the output indicates the implicit per-allele for the peptide sequence by the allele HLA-DRB1*10:01. For demonstration purposes, values for W1, b1, W2, and b2 are described in detail in international application PCT/US2018/028438, herein incorporated by reference for all that it teaches.
XIII. Example Computer
The storage device 1408 is a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium such as a hard drive, compact disk read-only memory (CD-ROM), DVD, or a solid-state memory device. The memory 1406 holds instructions and data used by the processor 1402. The input interface 1414 is a touch-screen interface, a mouse, track ball, or other type of pointing device, a keyboard, or some combination thereof, and is used to input data into the computer 1400. In some embodiments, the computer 1400 may be configured to receive input (e.g., commands) from the input interface 1414 via gestures from the user. The graphics adapter 1412 displays images and other information on the display 1418. The network adapter 1416 couples the computer 1400 to one or more computer networks.
The computer 1400 is adapted to execute computer program modules for providing functionality described herein. As used herein, the term “module” refers to computer program logic used to provide the specified functionality. Thus, a module can be implemented in hardware, firmware, and/or software. In one embodiment, program modules are stored on the storage device 1408, loaded into the memory 1406, and executed by the processor 1402.
The types of computers 1400 used by the entities of
XIV. Neoantigen Delivery Vector Example
Below are examples of specific embodiments for carrying out the present invention. The examples are offered for illustrative purposes only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention in any way. Efforts have been made to ensure accuracy with respect to numbers used (e.g., amounts, temperatures, etc.), but some experimental error and deviation should, of course, be allowed for.
The practice of the present invention will employ, unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology, within the skill of the art. Such techniques are explained fully in the literature. See, e.g., T. E. Creighton, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Properties (W. H. Freeman and Company, 1993); A. L. Lehninger, Biochemistry (Worth Publishers, Inc., current addition); Sambrook, et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (2nd Edition, 1989); Methods In Enzymology (S. Colowick and N. Kaplan eds., Academic Press, Inc.); Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition (Easton, Pennsylvania: Mack Publishing Company, 1990); Carey and Sundberg Advanced Organic Chemistry 3rd Ed. (Plenum Press) Vols A and B(1992).
XIV.A. Neoantigen Cassette Design
Through vaccination, multiple class I MHC restricted tumor-specific neoantigens (TSNAs) that stimulate the corresponding cellular immune response(s) can be delivered. In one example, a vaccine cassette was engineered to encode multiple epitopes as a single gene product where the epitopes were either embedded within their natural, surrounding peptide sequence or spaced by non-natural linker sequences. Several design parameters were identified that could potentially impact antigen processing and presentation and therefore the magnitude and breadth of the TSNA specific CD8 T cell responses. In the present example, several model cassettes were designed and constructed to evaluate: (1) whether robust T cell responses could be generated to multiple epitopes incorporated in a single expression cassette; (2) what makes an optimal linker placed between the TSNAs within the expression cassette—that leads to optimal processing and presentation of all epitopes; (3) if the relative position of the epitopes within the cassette impact T cell responses; (4) whether the number of epitopes within a cassette influences the magnitude or quality of the T cell responses to individual epitopes; (5) if the addition of cellular targeting sequences improves T cell responses.
Two readouts were developed to evaluate antigen presentation and T cell responses specific for marker epitopes within the model cassettes: (1) an in vitro cell-based screen which allowed assessment of antigen presentation as gauged by the activation of specially engineered reporter T cells (Aarnoudse et al., 2002; Nagai et al., 2012); and (2) an in vivo assay that used HLA-A2 transgenic mice (Vitiello et al., 1991) to assess post-vaccination immunogenicity of cassette-derived epitopes of human origin by their corresponding epitope-specific T cell responses (Comet et al., 2006; Depla et al., 2008; Ishioka et al., 1999).
XIV.B. Neoantigen Cassette Design Evaluation
XIV.B.1. Methods and Materials
The selected TCRs recognize peptides NLVPMVATV (SEQ ID NO: 132) (PDB #5D2N), CLGGLLTMV (SEQ ID NO: 133) (PDB #3REV), GILGFVFTL (SEQ ID NO: 134) (PDB #1OGA) LLFGYPVYV (SEQ ID NO: 135) (PDB #1A07) when presented by A*0201. Transfer vectors were constructed that contain 2A peptide-linked TCR subunits (beta followed by alpha), the EMCV IRES, and 2A-linked CD8 subunits (beta followed by alpha and by the puromycin resistance gene). Open reading frame sequences were codon-optimized and synthesized by GeneArt.
Peptides were purchased from ProImmune or Genscript diluted to 10 mg/mL with 10 mM tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP) in water/DMSO (2:8, v/v). Cell culture medium and supplements, unless otherwise noted, were from Gibco. Heat inactivated fetal bovine serum (FBShi) was from Seradigm. QUANTI-Luc Substrate, Zeocin, and Puromycin were from InvivoGen. Jurkat-Lucia NFAT Cells (InvivoGen) were maintained in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% FBShi, Sodium Pyruvate, and 100 μg/mL Zeocin. Once transduced, these cells additionally received 0.3 μg/mL Puromycin. T2 cells (ATCC CRL-1992) were cultured in Iscove's Medium (IMDM) plus 20% FBShi. U-87 MG (ATCC HTB-14) cells were maintained in MEM Eagles Medium supplemented with 10% FBShi.
Jurkat-Lucia NFAT cells contain an NFAT-inducible Lucia reporter construct. The Lucia gene, when activated by the engagement of the T cell receptor (TCR), causes secretion of a coelenterazine-utilizing luciferase into the culture medium. This luciferase can be measured using the QUANTI-Luc luciferase detection reagent. Jurkat-Lucia cells were transduced with lentivirus to express antigen-specific TCRs. The HIV-derived lentivirus transfer vector was obtained from GeneCopoeia, and lentivirus support plasmids expressing VSV-G (pCMV-VsvG), Rev (pRSV-Rev) and Gag-pol (pCgpV) were obtained from Cell Design Labs.
Lentivirus was prepared by transfection of 50-80% confluent T75 flasks of HEK293 cells with Lipofectamine 2000 (Thermo Fisher), using 40 μl of lipofectamine and 20 μg of the DNA mixture (4:2:1:1 by weight of the transfer plasmid:pCgpV:pRSV-Rev:pCMV-VsvG). 8-10 mL of the virus-containing media were concentrated using the Lenti-X system (Clontech), and the virus resuspended in 100-200 μl of fresh medium. This volume was used to overlay an equal volume of Jurkat-Lucia cells (5−10E4-1−10E6 cells were used in different experiments). Following culture in 0.3 μg/ml puromycin-containing medium, cells were sorted to obtain clonality. These Jurkat-Lucia TCR clones were tested for activity and selectivity using peptide loaded T2 cells.
T2 cells are routinely used to examine antigen recognition by TCRs. T2 cells lack a peptide transporter for antigen processing (TAP deficient) and cannot load endogenous peptides in the endoplasmic reticulum for presentation on the MHC. However, the T2 cells can easily be loaded with exogenous peptides. The five marker peptides (NLVPMVATV (SEQ ID NO: 132), CLGGLLTMV (SEQ ID NO: 133), GLCTLVAML (SEQ ID NO: 136), LLFGYPVYV (SEQ ID NO: 135), GILGFVFTL (SEQ ID NO: 134)) and two irrelevant peptides (WLSLLVPFV (SEQ ID NO: 137), FLLTRICT (SEQ ID NO: 138)) were loaded onto T2 cells. Briefly, T2 cells were counted and diluted to 1×106 cells/mL with IMDM plus 1% FBShi. Peptides were added to result in 10 μg peptide/1×106 cells. Cells were then incubated at 37° C. for 90 minutes. Cells were washed twice with IMDM plus 20% FBShi, diluted to 5×10E5 cells/mL and 100 μL plated into a 96-well Costar tissue culture plate. Jurkat-Lucia TCR clones were counted and diluted to 5×10E5 cells/mL in RPMI 1640 plus 10% FBShi and 100 μL added to the T2 cells. Plates were incubated overnight at 37° C., 5% CO2. Plates were then centrifuged at 400 g for 3 minutes and 20 μL supernatant removed to a white flat bottom Greiner plate. QUANTI-Luc substrate was prepared according to instructions and 50 μL/well added. Luciferase expression was read on a Molecular Devices SpectraMax iE3x.
To test marker epitope presentation by the adenoviral cassettes, U-87 MG cells were used as surrogate antigen presenting cells (APCs) and were transduced with the adenoviral vectors. U-87 MG cells were harvested and plated in culture media as 5×10E5 cells/100 μl in a 96-well Costar tissue culture plate. Plates were incubated for approximately 2 hours at 37° C. Adenoviral cassettes were diluted with MEM plus 10% FBShi to an MOI of 100, 50, 10, 5, 1 and 0 and added to the U-87 MG cells as 5 μl/well. Plates were again incubated for approximately 2 hours at 37° C. Jurkat-Lucia TCR clones were counted and diluted to 5×10E5 cells/mL in RPMI plus 10% FBShi and added to the U-87 MG cells as 100 μL/well. Plates were then incubated for approximately 24 hours at 37° C., 5% C02. Plates were centrifuged at 400 g for 3 minutes and 20 μL supernatant removed to a white flat bottom Greiner plate. QUANTI-Luc substrate was prepared according to instructions and 50 μL/well added. Luciferase expression was read on a Molecular Devices SpectraMax iE3x.
Transgenic HLA-A2.1 (HLA-A2 Tg) mice were obtained from Taconic Labs, Inc. These mice carry a transgene consisting of a chimeric class I molecule comprised of the human HLA-A2.1 leader, α1, and α2 domains and the murine H2-Kb α3, transmembrane, and cytoplasmic domains (Vitiello et al., 1991). Mice used for these studies were the first generation offspring (F1) of wild type BALB/cAnNTac females and homozygous HLA-A2.1 Tg males on the C57B11/6 background.
HLA-A2 Tg mice were immunized with 1×1010 to 1×106 viral particles of adenoviral vectors via bilateral intramuscular injection into the tibialis anterior. Immune responses were measured at 12 days post-immunization.
Lymphocytes were isolated from freshly harvested spleens and lymph nodes of immunized mice. Tissues were dissociated in RPMI containing 10% fetal bovine serum with penicillin and streptomycin (complete RPMI) using the GentleMACS tissue dissociator according to the manufacturer's instructions.
ELISPOT analysis was performed according to ELISPOT harmonization guidelines (Janetzki et al., 2015) with the mouse IFNg ELISpotPLUS kit (MABTECH). 1×105 splenocytes were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 16 hours in 96-well IFNg antibody coated plates. Spots were developed using alkaline phosphatase. The reaction was timed for 10 minutes and was quenched by running the plate under tap water. Spots were counted using an AID vSpot Reader Spectrum. For ELISPOT analysis, wells with saturation >50% were recorded as “too numerous to count”. Samples with deviation of replicate wells >10% were excluded from analysis. Spot counts were then corrected for well confluency using the formula: spot count+2×(spot count×% confluence/[100%−% confluence]). Negative background was corrected by subtraction of spot counts in the negative peptide stimulation wells from the antigen stimulated wells. Finally, wells labeled too numerous to count were set to the highest observed corrected value, rounded up to the nearest hundred.
Freshly isolated lymphocytes at a density of 2-5×106 cells/mL were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 2 hours. After two hours, brefeldin A was added to a concentration of 5 ug/ml and cells were incubated with stimulant for an additional 4 hours. Following stimulation, viable cells were labeled with fixable viability dye eFluor780 according to manufacturer's protocol and stained with anti-CD8 APC (clone 53-6.7, BioLegend) at 1:400 dilution. Anti-IFNg PE (clone XMG1.2, BioLegend) was used at 1:100 for intracellular staining. Samples were collected on an Attune NxT Flow Cytometer (Thermo Scientific). Flow cytometry data was plotted and analyzed using FlowJo. To assess degree of antigen-specific response, both the percent IFNg+ of CD8+ cells and the total IFNg+ cell number/1×106 live cells were calculated in response to each peptide stimulant.
XIV.B.2. In Vitro Evaluation of Neoantigen Cassette Designs
As an example of neoantigen cassette design evaluation, an in vitro cell-based assay was developed to assess whether selected human epitopes within model vaccine cassettes were being expressed, processed, and presented by antigen-presenting cells (
Individual Jurkat-Lucia reporter lines were modified by lentiviral transduction with an expression construct that includes an antigen-specific TCR beta and TCR alpha chain separated by a P2A ribosomal skip sequence to ensure equimolar amounts of translated product (Banu et al., 2014). The addition of a second CD8 beta-P2A-CD8 alpha element to the lentiviral construct provided expression of the CD8 co-receptor, which the parent reporter cell line lacks, as CD8 on the cell surface is crucial for the binding affinity to target pMHC molecules and enhances signaling through engagement of its cytoplasmic tail (Lyons et al., 2006; Yachi et al., 2006).
After lentiviral transduction, the Jurkat-Lucia reporters were expanded under puromycin selection, subjected to single cell fluorescence assisted cell sorting (FACS), and the monoclonal populations tested for luciferase expression. This yielded stably transduced reporter cell lines for specific peptide antigens 1, 2, 4, and 5 with functional cell responses. (Table 2).
In another example, a series of short cassettes, all marker epitopes were incorporated in the same position (
In another example, an additional series of short cassettes were constructed that, besides human and mouse epitopes, contained targeting sequences such as ubiquitin (Ub), MHC and Ig-kappa signal peptides (SP), and/or MHC transmembrane (TM) motifs positioned on either the N- or C-terminus of the cassette. (
XIV.B.3. In Vivo Evaluation of Neoantigen Cassette Designs
As another example of neoantigen cassette design evaluation, vaccine cassettes were designed to contain 5 well-characterized human class I MHC epitopes known to stimulate CD8 T cells in an HLA-A*02:01 restricted fashion (
For the short cassettes, all marker epitopes generated a T cell response, as determined by IFN-gamma ELISPOT, that was approximately 10-50× stronger of what has been commonly reported (Comet et al., 2006; Depla et al., 2008; Ishioka et al., 1999). Of all the linkers evaluated, the concatamer of 25mer sequences, each containing a minimal epitope flanked by their natural amino acids sequences, generated the largest and broadest T cell response (Table 5). Intracellular cytokine staining (ICS) and flow cytometry analysis revealed that the antigen-specific T cell responses are derived from CD8 T cells.
In another example, a series of long vaccine cassettes was constructed and incorporated in adenoviral vectors that, next to the original 5 marker epitopes, contained an additional 16 HLA-A*02:01, A*03:01 and B*44:05 epitopes with known CD8 T cell reactivity (
XIV.B.4. Neoantigen Cassette Design for Immunogenicity and Toxicology Studies
In summary, the findings of the model cassette evaluations (
As a further example, based on the in vitro and in vivo data obtained with model cassettes (
XV. ChAd Neoantigen Cassette Delivery Vector
XV.A. ChAd Neoantigen Cassette Delivery Vector Construction
In one example, Chimpanzee adenovirus (ChAd) was engineered to be a delivery vector for neoantigen cassettes. In a further example, a full-length ChAdV68 vector was synthesized based on AC_000011.1 (sequence 2 from U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,716) with E1 (nt 457 to 3014) and E3 (nt 27,816-31,332) sequences deleted. Reporter genes under the control of the CMV promoter/enhancer were inserted in place of the deleted E1 sequences. Transfection of this clone into HEK293 cells did not yield infectious virus. To confirm the sequence of the wild-type C68 virus, isolate VR-594 was obtained from the ATCC, passaged, and then independently sequenced (SEQ ID NO:10). When comparing the AC_000011.1 sequence to the ATCC VR-594 sequence (SEQ ID NO:10) of wild-type ChAdV68 virus, 6 nucleotide differences were identified. In one example, a modified ChAdV68 vector was generated based on AC_000011.1, with the corresponding ATCC VR-594 nucleotides substituted at five positions (ChAdV68.5WTnt SEQ ID NO:1).
In another example, a modified ChAdV68 vector was generated based on AC_000011.1 with E1 (nt 577 to 3403) and E3 (nt 27,816-31,332) sequences deleted and the corresponding ATCC VR-594 nucleotides substituted at four positions. A GFP reporter (ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP; SEQ ID NO:11) or model neoantigen cassette (ChAdV68.4WTnt.MAG25mer; SEQ ID NO:12) under the control of the CMV promoter/enhancer was inserted in place of deleted E1 sequences.
In another example, a modified ChAdV68 vector was generated based on AC_000011.1 with E1 (nt 577 to 3403) and E3 (nt 27,125-31,825) sequences deleted and the corresponding ATCC VR-594 nucleotides substituted at five positions. A GFP reporter (ChAdV68.5WTnt.GFP; SEQ ID NO:13) or model neoantigen cassette (ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer; SEQ ID NO:2) under the control of the CMV promoter/enhancer was inserted in place of deleted E1 sequences.
XV.B. ChAd Neoandigen Cassette Delivery Vector Testing
XV.B.1. ChAd Vector Evaluation Methods and Materials
DNA for the ChAdV68 constructs (ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP, ChAdV68.5WTnt.GFP, ChAdV68.4WTnt.MAG25mer and ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer) was prepared and transfected into HEK293A cells using the following protocol.
10 ug of plasmid DNA was digested with PacI to liberate the viral genome. DNA was then purified using GeneJet DNA cleanup Micro columns (Thermo Fisher) according to manufacturer's instructions for long DNA fragments, and eluted in 20 ul of pre-heated water, columns were left at 37 degrees for 0.5-1 hours before the elution step.
HEK293A cells were introduced into 6-well plates at a cell density of 106 cells/well 14-18 hours prior to transfection. Cells were overlaid with 1 ml of fresh medium (DMEM-10% hiFBS with pen/strep and glutamate) per well. 1-2 ug of purified DNA was used per well in a transfection with twice the ul volume (2-4 ul) of Lipofectamine2000, according to the manufacturer's protocol. 0.5 ml of OPTI-MEM medium containing the transfection mix was added to the 1 ml of normal growth medium in each well, and left on cells overnight.
Transfected cell cultures were incubated at 37° C. for at least 5-7 days. If viral plaques were not visible by day 7 post-transfection, cells were split 1:4 or 1:6, and incubated at 37° C. to monitor for plaque development. Alternatively, transfected cells were harvested and subjected to 3 cycles of freezing and thawing and the cell lysates were used to infect HEK293A cells and the cells were incubated until virus plaques were observed.
Transfection of ChAdV68 Vectors into HEK293A Cells Using Calcium Phosphate and Generation of the Tertiary Viral Stock
DNA for the ChAdV68 constructs (ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP, ChAdV68.5WTnt.GFP, ChAdV68.4WTnt.MAG25mer, ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer) was prepared and transfected into HEK293A cells using the following protocol.
HEK293A cells were seeded one day prior to the transfection at 106 cells/well of a 6 well plate in 5% BS/DMEM/1×P/S, 1×Glutamax. Two wells are needed per transfection. Two to four hours prior to transfection the media was changed to fresh media. The ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP plasmid was linearized with PacI. The linearized DNA was then phenol chloroform extracted and precipitated using one tenth volume of 3M Sodium acetate pH 5.3 and two volumes of 100% ethanol. The precipitated DNA was pelleted by centrifugation at 12,000×g for 5 min before washing 1× with 70% ethanol. The pellet was air dried and re-suspended in 50 μL of sterile water. The DNA concentration was determined using a NanoDrop™ (ThermoFisher) and the volume adjusted to 5 μg of DNA/50 μL.
169 μL of sterile water was added to a microfuge tube. 5 μL of 2M CaCl2 was then added to the water and mixed gently by pipetting. 50 μL of DNA was added dropwise to the CaCl2 water solution. Twenty six μL of 2M CaCl2 was then added and mixed gently by pipetting twice with a micro-pipetor. This final solution should consist of 5 μg of DNA in 250 μL of 0.25M CaCl2. A second tube was then prepared containing 250 μL of 2×HBS (Hepes buffered solution). Using a 2 mL sterile pipette attached to a Pipet-Aid air was slowly bubbled through the 2×HBS solution. At the same time the DNA solution in the 0.25M CaCl2 solution was added in a dropwise fashion. Bubbling was continued for approximately 5 seconds after addition of the final DNA droplet. The solution was then incubated at room temperature for up to 20 minutes before adding to 293A cells. 250 μL of the DNA/Calcium phosphate solution was added dropwise to a monolayer of 293A cells that had been seeded one day prior at 106 cells per well of a 6 well plate. The cells were returned to the incubator and incubated overnight. The media was changed 24 h later. After 72 h the cells were split 1:6 into a 6 well plate. The monolayers were monitored daily by light microscopy for evidence of cytopathic effect (CPE). 7-10 days post transfection viral plaques were observed and the monolayer harvested by pipetting the media in the wells to lift the cells. The harvested cells and media were transferred to a 50 mL centrifuge tube followed by three rounds of freeze thawing (at −80° C. and 37° C.). The subsequent lysate, called the primary virus stock was clarified by centrifugation at full speed on a bench top centrifuge (4300×g) and a proportion of the lysate 10-50%) used to infect 293A cells in a T25 flask. The infected cells were incubated for 48 h before harvesting cells and media at complete CPE. The cells were once again harvested, freeze thawed and clarified before using this secondary viral stock to infect a T150 flask seeded at 1.5×107 cells per flask. Once complete CPE was achieved at 72 h the media and cells were harvested and treated as with earlier viral stocks to generate a tertiary stock.
ChAdV68 virus production was performed in 293F cells grown in 293 FreeStyle™ (ThermoFisher) media in an incubator at 8% CO2. On the day of infection cells were diluted to 106 cells per mL, with 98% viability and 400 mL were used per production run in 1 L Shake flasks (Corning). 4 mL of the tertiary viral stock with a target MOI of >3.3 was used per infection. The cells were incubated for 48-72 h until the viability was <70% as measured by Trypan blue. The infected cells were then harvested by centrifugation, full speed bench top centrifuge and washed in 1×PBS, re-centrifuged and then re-suspended in 20 mL of 10 mM Tris pH7.4. The cell pellet was lysed by freeze thawing 3× and clarified by centrifugation at 4,300×g for 5 minutes.
Viral DNA was purified by CsCl centrifugation. Two discontinuous gradient runs were performed. The first to purify virus from cellular components and the second to further refine separation from cellular components and separate defective from infectious particles.
10 mL of 1.2 (26.8 g CsCl dissolved in 92 mL of 10 mM Tris pH 8.0) CsCl was added to polyallomer tubes. Then 8 mL of 1.4 CsCl (53 g CsCl dissolved in 87 mL of 10 mM Tris pH 8.0) was carefully added using a pipette delivering to the bottom of the tube. The clarified virus was carefully layered on top of the 1.2 layer. If needed more 10 mM Tris was added to balance the tubes. The tubes were then placed in a SW-32Ti rotor and centrifuged for 2 h 30 min at 10° C. The tube was then removed to a laminar flow cabinet and the virus band pulled using an 18 guage needle and a 10 mL syringe. Care was taken not to remove contaminating host cell DNA and protein. The band was then diluted at least 2× with 10 mM Tris pH 8.0 and layered as before on a discontinuous gradient as described above. The run was performed as described before except that this time the run was performed overnight. The next day the band was pulled with care to avoid pulling any of the defective particle band. The virus was then dialyzed using a Slide-a-Lyzer™ Cassette (Pierce) against ARM buffer (20 mM Tris pH 8.0, 25 mM NaCl, 2.5% Glycerol). This was performed 3×, 1 h per buffer exchange. The virus was then aliquoted for storage at −80° C.
VP concentration was performed by using an OD 260 assay based on the extinction coefficient of 1.1×1012 viral particles (VP) is equivalent to an Absorbance value of 1 at OD260 nm. Two dilutions (1:5 and 1:10) of adenovirus were made in a viral lysis buffer (0.1% SDS, 10 mM Tris pH 7.4, 1 mM EDTA). OD was measured in duplicate at both dilutions and the VP concentration/mL was measured by multiplying the OD260 value X dilution factor X 1.1×1012VP.
An infectious unit (IU) titer was calculated by a limiting dilution assay of the viral stock. The virus was initially diluted 100× in DMEM/5% NS/1×PS and then subsequently diluted using 10-fold dilutions down to 1×10−7. 100 μL of these dilutions were then added to 293A cells that were seeded at least an hour before at 3e5 cells/well of a 24 well plate. This was performed in duplicate. Plates were incubated for 48 h in a CO2 (5%) incubator at 37° C. The cells were then washed with 1×PBS and were then fixed with 100% cold methanol (−20° C.). The plates were then incubated at −20° C. for a minimum of 20 minutes. The wells were washed with 1×PBS then blocked in 1×PBS/0.1% BSA for 1 h at room temperature. A rabbit anti-Ad antibody (Abcam, Cambridge, MA) was added at 1:8,000 dilution in blocking buffer (0.25 ml per well) and incubated for 1 h at room temperature. The wells were washed 4× with 0.5 mL PBS per well. A HRP conjugated Goat anti-Rabbit antibody (Bethyl Labs, Montgomery Texas) diluted 1000× was added per well and incubated for 1 h prior to a final round of washing. 5 PBS washes were performed and the plates were developed using DAB (Diaminobenzidine tetrahydrochloride) substrate in Tris buffered saline (0.67 mg/mL DAB in 50 mM Tris pH 7.5, 150 mM NaCl) with 0.01% H2O2. Wells were developed for 5 min prior to counting. Cells were counted under a 10× objective using a dilution that gave between 4-40 stained cells per field of view. The field of view that was used was a 0.32 mm2 grid of which there are equivalent to 625 per field of view on a 24 well plate. The number of infectious viruses/mL can be determined by the number of stained cells per grid multiplied by the number of grids per field of view multiplied by a dilution factor 10. Similarly, when working with GFP expressing cells florescent can be used rather than capsid staining to determine the number of GFP expressing virions per mL.
C57BL/6J female mice and Balb/c female mice were injected with 1×108 viral particles (VP) of ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer in 100 uL volume, bilateral intramuscular injection (50 uL per leg).
Spleen and lymph nodes for each mouse were pooled in 3 mL of complete RPMI (RPMI, 10% FBS, penicillin/streptomycin). Mechanical dissociation was performed using the gentleMACS Dissociator (Miltenyi Biotec), following manufacturer's protocol. Dissociated cells were filtered through a 40 micron filter and red blood cells were lysed with ACK lysis buffer (150 mM NH4Cl, 10 mM KHCO3, 0.1 mM Na2EDTA). Cells were filtered again through a 30 micron filter and then resuspended in complete RPMI. Cells were counted on the Attune N×T flow cytometer (Thermo Fisher) using propidium iodide staining to exclude dead and apoptotic cells. Cell were then adjusted to the appropriate concentration of live cells for subsequent analysis.
ELISPOT analysis was performed according to ELISPOT harmonization guidelines {DOI: 10.1038/nprot.2015.068} with the mouse IFNg ELISpotPLUS kit (MABTECH). 5×104 splenocytes were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 16 hours in 96-well IFNg antibody coated plates. Spots were developed using alkaline phosphatase. The reaction was timed for 10 minutes and was terminated by running plate under tap water. Spots were counted using an AID vSpot Reader Spectrum. For ELISPOT analysis, wells with saturation >50% were recorded as “too numerous to count”. Samples with deviation of replicate wells >10% were excluded from analysis. Spot counts were then corrected for well confluency using the formula: spot count+2×(spot count×% confluence/[100%−% confluence]). Negative background was corrected by subtraction of spot counts in the negative peptide stimulation wells from the antigen stimulated wells. Finally, wells labeled too numerous to count were set to the highest observed corrected value, rounded up to the nearest hundred.
XV.B.2. Production of ChAdV68 Viral Delivery Particles after DNA Transfection
In one example, ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP (
XV.B.3. ChAdV68 Viral Delivery Particles Expansion
In one example, ChAdV68.4WTnt.GFP, ChAdV68.5WTnt.GFP, and ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer viruses were expanded in HEK293F cells and a purified virus stock produced 18 days after transfection (
XV.B.4. Evaluation of Immunogenicity in Tumor Models
C68 vector expressing mouse tumor antigens were evaluated in mouse immunogenicity studies to demonstrate the C68 vector elicits T-cell responses. T-cell responses to the MHC class I epitope SIINFEKL (SEQ ID NO: 57) were measured in C57BL/6J female mice and the MHC class I epitope AH1-A5 (Slansky et al., 2000, Immunity 13:529-538) measured in Balb/c mice. As shown in
XVI. Alphavirus Neoantigen Cassette Delivery Vector
XVI.A. Alphavirus Delivery Vector Evaluation Materials and Methods
For in vitro testing: plasmid DNA was linearized by restriction digest with PmeI, column purified following manufacturer's protocol (GeneJet DNA cleanup kit, Thermo) and used as template. In vitro transcription was performed using the RiboMAX Large Scale RNA production System (Promega) with the m7G cap analog (Promega) according to manufacturer's protocol. mRNA was purified using the RNeasy kit (Qiagen) according to manufacturer's protocol.
For in vivo studies: RNA was generated and purified by TriLInk Biotechnologies and capped with Enzymatic Cap1.
HEK293A cells were seeded at 6e4 cells/well for 96 wells and 2e5 cells/well for 24 wells, ˜16 hours prior to transfection. Cells were transfected with mRNA using MessengerMAX lipofectamine (Invitrogen) and following manufacturer's protocol. For 96-wells, 0.15 uL of lipofectamine and 10 ng of mRNA was used per well, and for 24-wells, 0.75 uL of lipofectamine and 150 ng of mRNA was used per well. A GFP expressing mRNA (TriLink Biotechnologies) was used as a transfection control.
Luciferase reporter assay was performed in white-walled 96-well plates with each condition in triplicate using the ONE-Glo luciferase assay (Promega) following manufacturer's protocol. Luminescence was measured using the SpectraMax.
qRT-PCR
Transfected cells were rinsed and replaced with fresh media 2 hours post transfection to remove any untransfected mRNA. Cells were then harvested at various timepoints in RLT plus lysis buffer (Qiagen), homogenized using a QiaShredder (Qiagen) and RNA was extracted using the RNeasy kit (Qiagen), all according to manufacturer's protocol. Total RNA was quantified using a Nanodrop (Thermo Scientific). qRT-PCR was performed using the Quantitect Probe One-Step RT-PCR kit (Qiagen) on the qTower3 (Analytik Jena) according to manufacturer's protocol, using 20 ng of total RNA per reaction. Each sample was run in triplicate for each probe. Actin or GusB were used as reference genes. Custom primer/probes were generated by IDT (Table 8).
C57B1J6J mice were injected in the lower left abdominal flank with 105 B16-OVA cells/animal. Tumors were allowed to grow for 3 days prior to immunization.
Balb/c mice were injected in the lower left abdominal flank with 106 CT26 cells/animal. Tumors were allowed to grow for 7 days prior to immunization.
For srRNA vaccine, mice were injected with 10 ug of RNA in 100 uL volume, bilateral intramuscular injection (50 uL per leg). For Ad5 vaccine, mice were injected with 5×1010 viral particles (VP) in 100 uL volume, bilateral intramuscular injection (50 uL per leg). Animals were injected with anti-CTLA-4 (clone 9D39, BioXcell), anti-PD-1 (clone RMP1-14, BioXcell) or anti-IgG (clone MPC-11, BioXcell), 250 ug dose, 2 times per week, via intraperitoneal injection.
At each timepoint mice were injected with 150 mg/kg luciferin substrate via intraperitoneal injection and bioluminescence was measured using the IVIS In vivo imaging system (PerkinElmer) 10-15 minutes after injection.
Spleen and lymph nodes for each mouse were pooled in 3 mL of complete RPMI (RPMI, 10% FBS, penicillin/streptomycin). Mechanical dissociation was performed using the gentleMACS Dissociator (Miltenyi Biotec), following manufacturer's protocol. Dissociated cells were filtered through a 40 micron filter and red blood cells were lysed with ACK lysis buffer (150 mM NH4Cl, 10 mM KHCO3, 0.1 mM Na2EDTA). Cells were filtered again through a 30 micron filter and then resuspended in complete RPMI. Cells were counted on the Attune N×T flow cytometer (Thermo Fisher) using propidium iodide staining to exclude dead and apoptotic cells. Cell were then adjusted to the appropriate concentration of live cells for subsequent analysis.
ELISPOT analysis was performed according to ELISPOT harmonization guidelines {DOI: 10.1038/nprot.2015.068} with the mouse IFNg ELISpotPLUS kit (MABTECH). 5×104 splenocytes were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 16 hours in 96-well IFNg antibody coated plates. Spots were developed using alkaline phosphatase. The reaction was timed for 10 minutes and was terminated by running plate under tap water. Spots were counted using an AID vSpot Reader Spectrum. For ELISPOT analysis, wells with saturation >50% were recorded as “too numerous to count”. Samples with deviation of replicate wells >10% were excluded from analysis. Spot counts were then corrected for well confluency using the formula: spot count+2×(spot count×% confluence/[100%−% confluence]). Negative background was corrected by subtraction of spot counts in the negative peptide stimulation wells from the antigen stimulated wells. Finally, wells labeled too numerous to count were set to the highest observed corrected value, rounded up to the nearest hundred.
XVI.B. Alphavirus Vector
XVI.B.1. Alphavirus Vector In Vitro Evaluation
In one implementation of the present invention, a RNA alphavirus backbone for the neoantigen expression system was generated from a Venezuelan Equine Encephalitis (VEE) (Kinney, 1986, Virology 152: 400-413) based self-replicating RNA (srRNA) vector. In one example, the sequences encoding the structural proteins of VEE located 3′ of the 26S sub-genomic promoter were deleted (VEE sequences 7544 to 11,175 deleted; numbering based on Kinney et al 1986; SEQ ID NO:6) and replaced by antigen sequences (SEQ ID NO:14 and SEQ ID NO:4) or a luciferase reporter (e.g., VEE-Luciferase, SEQ ID NO:15) (
In another example, replication of the srRNA was confirmed directly by measuring RNA levels after transfection of either the luciferase encoding srRNA (VEE-Luciferase) or an srRNA encoding a multi-epitope cassette (VEE-MAG25mer) using quantitative reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction (qRT-PCR). An ˜150-fold increase in RNA was observed for the VEE-luciferase srRNA (Table 10), while a 30-50-fold increase in RNA was observed for the VEE-MAG25mer srRNA (Table 11). These data confirm that the VEE srRNA vectors replicate when transfected into cells.
XVI.B.2. Alphavirus Vector In Vivo Evaluation
In another example, VEE-Luciferase reporter expression was evaluated in vivo. Mice were injected with 10 ug of VEE-Luciferase srRNA encapsulated in lipid nanoparticle (MC3) and imaged at 24 and 48 hours, and 7 and 14 days post injection to determine bioluminescent signal. Luciferase signal was detected at 24 hours post injection and increased over time and appeared to peak at 7 days after srRNA injection (
XVI.B.3. Alphavirus Vector Tumor Model Evaluation
In one implementation, to determine if the VEE srRNA vector directs antigen-specific immune responses in vivo, a VEE srRNA vector was generated (VEE-UbAAY, SEQ ID NO:14) that expresses 2 different MHC class I mouse tumor epitopes, SIINFEKL (SEQ ID NO: 57) and AH1-A5 (Slansky et al., 2000, Immunity 13:529-538). The SFL (SIINFEKL (SEQ ID NO: 57)) epitope is expressed by the B16-OVA melanoma cell line, and the AH1-A5 (SPSYAYHQF (SEQ ID NO: 58); Slansky et al., 2000, Immunity) epitope induces T cells targeting a related epitope (AH1/SPSYVYHQF (SEQ ID NO: 193); Huang et al., 1996, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 93:9730-9735) that is expressed by the CT26 colon carcinoma cell line. In one example, for in vivo studies, VEE-UbAAY srRNA was generated by in vitro transcription using T7 polymerase (TriLink Biotechnologies) and encapsulated in a lipid nanoparticle (MC3).
A strong antigen-specific T-cell response targeting SFL, relative to control, was observed two weeks after immunization of B16-OVA tumor bearing mice with MC3 formulated VEE-UbAAY srRNA. In one example, a median of 3835 spot forming cells (SFC) per 106 splenocytes was measured after stimulation with the SFL peptide in ELISpot assays (
In another implementation, to mirror a clinical approach, a heterologous prime/boost in the B16-OVA and CT26 mouse tumor models was performed, where tumor bearing mice were immunized first with adenoviral vector expressing the same antigen cassette (Ad5-UbAAY), followed by a boost immunization with the VEE-UbAAY srRNA vaccine 14 days after the Ad5-UbAAY prime. In one example, an antigen-specific immune response was induced by the Ad5-UbAAY vaccine resulting in 7330 (median) SFCs per 106 splenocytes measured in the ELISpot assay (
In another implementation, similar results were observed after an Ad5-UbAAY prime and VEE-UbAAY srRNA boost in the CT26 mouse model. In one example, an AH1 antigen-specific response was observed after the Ad5-UbAAY prime (day 14) with a mean of 5187 SF-Cs per 106 splenocytes measured in the ELISpot assay (
XVII. ChAdV/srRNA Combination Tumor Model Evaluation
Various dosing protocols using ChAdV68 and self-replicating RNA (srRNA) were evaluated in murine CT26 tumor models.
XVII.A ChAdV/srRNA Combination Tumor Model Evaluation Methods and Materials
Balb/c mice were injected with the CT26 tumor cell line. 7 days after tumor cell injection, mice were randomized to the different study arms (28-40 mice per group) and treatment initiated. Balb/c mice were injected in the lower left abdominal flank with 106 CT26 cells/animal. Tumors were allowed to grow for 7 days prior to immunization. The study arms are described in detail in Table 15.
For srRNA vaccine, mice were injected with 10 ug of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA in 100 uL volume, bilateral intramuscular injection (50 uL per leg). For C68 vaccine, mice were injected with 1×1011 viral particles (VP) of ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer in 100 uL volume, bilateral intramuscular injection (50 uL per leg). Animals were injected with anti-PD-1 (clone RMP1-14, BioXcell) or anti-IgG (clone MPC-11, BioXcell), 250 ug dose, 2 times per week, via intraperitoneal injection.
Spleen and lymph nodes for each mouse were pooled in 3 mL of complete RPMI (RPMI, 10% FBS, penicillin/streptomycin). Mechanical dissociation was performed using the gentleMACS Dissociator (Miltenyi Biotec), following manufacturer's protocol. Dissociated cells were filtered through a 40 micron filter and red blood cells were lysed with ACK lysis buffer (150 mM NH4Cl, 10 mM KHCO3, 0.1 mM Na2EDTA). Cells were filtered again through a 30 micron filter and then resuspended in complete RPMI. Cells were counted on the Attune N×T flow cytometer (Thermo Fisher) using propidium iodide staining to exclude dead and apoptotic cells. Cell were then adjusted to the appropriate concentration of live cells for subsequent analysis.
ELISPOT analysis was performed according to ELISPOT harmonization guidelines {DOI: 10.1038/nprot.2015.068} with the mouse IFNg ELISpotPLUS kit (MABTECH). 5×104 splenocytes were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 16 hours in 96-well IFNg antibody coated plates. Spots were developed using alkaline phosphatase. The reaction was timed for 10 minutes and was terminated by running plate under tap water. Spots were counted using an AID vSpot Reader Spectrum. For ELISPOT analysis, wells with saturation >50% were recorded as “too numerous to count”. Samples with deviation of replicate wells >10% were excluded from analysis. Spot counts were then corrected for well confluency using the formula: spot count+2×(spot count×% confluence/[100%−% confluence]). Negative background was corrected by subtraction of spot counts in the negative peptide stimulation wells from the antigen stimulated wells. Finally, wells labeled too numerous to count were set to the highest observed corrected value, rounded up to the nearest hundred.
XVH.B ChAdV/srRNA Combination Evaluation in a CT26 Tumor Model
The immunogenicity and efficacy of the ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA heterologous prime/boost or VEE-MAG25mer srRNA homologous prime/boost vaccines were evaluated in the CT26 mouse tumor model. Balb/c mice were injected with the CT26 tumor cell line. 7 days after tumor cell injection, mice were randomized to the different study arms and treatment initiated. The study arms are described in detail in Table 15 and more generally in Table 16.
Spleens were harvested 14 days after the prime vaccination for immune monitoring. Tumor and body weight measurements were taken twice a week and survival was monitored. Strong immune responses relative to control were observed in all active vaccine groups. Median cellular immune responses of 10,630, 12,976, 3319, or 3745 spot forming cells (SFCs) per 106 splenocytes were observed in ELISpot assays in mice immunized with ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer (ChAdV/group 3), ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer+anti-PD-1 (ChAdV+PD-1/group 4), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA (srRNA/median for groups 5 & 7 combined), or VEE-MAG25mer srRNA+anti-PD-1 (srRNA+PD-1/median for groups 6 & 8 combined), respectively, 14 days after the first immunization (
Consistent with the ELISpot data, 5.6, 7.8, 1.8 or 1.9% of CD8 T cells (median) exhibited antigen-specific responses in intracellular cytokine staining (ICS) analyses for mice immunized with ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer (ChAdV/group 3), ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer+anti-PD-1 (ChAdV+PD-1/group 4), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA (srRNA/median for groups 5 & 7 combined), or VEE-MAG25mer srRNA+anti-PD-1 (srRNA+PD-1/median for groups 6 & 8 combined), respectively, 14 days after the first immunization (
Tumor growth was measured in the CT26 colon tumor model for all groups, and tumor growth up to 21 days after treatment initiation (28 days after injection of CT-26 tumor cells) is presented. Mice were sacrificed 21 days after treatment initiation based on large tumor sizes (>2500 mm3); therefore, only the first 21 days are presented to avoid analytical bias. Mean tumor volumes at 21 days were 1129, 848, 2142, 1418, 2198 and 1606 mm3 for ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost (group 3), ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost+anti-PD-1 (group 4), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer boost (group 5), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer boost+anti-PD-1 (group 6), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost (group 7) and VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost+anti-PD-1 (group 8), respectively (
Survival was monitored for 35 days after treatment initiation in the CT-26 tumor model (42 days after injection of CT-26 tumor cells). Improved survival was observed after vaccination of mice with 4 of the combinations tested. After vaccination, 64%, 46%, 41% and 36% of mice survived with ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost in combination with anti-PD-1 (group 4; P<0.0001 relative to control group 1), VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost in combination with anti-PD-1 (group 8; P=0.0006 relative to control group 1), ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime/VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost (group 3; P=0.0003 relative to control group 1) and VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime/ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer boost in combination with anti-PD-1 (group 6; P=0.0016 relative to control group 1), respectively (
In conclusion, ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer and VEE-MAG25mer srRNA elicited strong T-cell responses to mouse tumor antigens encoded by the vaccines, relative to control. Administration of a ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime and VEE-MAG25mer srRNA boost with or without co-administration of anti-PD-1, VEE-MAG25mer srRNA prime and ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer boost in combination with anti-PD-1 or administration of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA as a homologous prime boost immunization in combination with anti-PD-1 to tumor bearing mice resulted in improved survival.
XVIII. Non-Human Primate Studies
Various dosing protocols using ChAdV68 and self-replicating RNA (srRNA) were evaluated in non-human primates (NHP).
Materials and Methods
A priming vaccine was injected intramuscularly (IM) in each NHP to initiate the study (vaccine prime). One or more boosting vaccines (vaccine boost) were also injected intramuscularly in each NHP. Bilateral injections per dose were administered according to groups outlined in tables and summarized below.
Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques were immunized bilaterally with 1×1012 viral particles (5×1011 viral particles per injection) of ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer, 30 ug of VEE-MAG25MER srRNA, 100 ug of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA or 300 ug of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA formulated in LNP-1 or LNP-2. Vaccine boosts of 30 ug, 100 ug or 300 ug VEE-MAG25mer srRNA were administered intramuscularly at the indicated time after prime vaccination.
PBMCs were isolated at indicated times after prime vaccination using Lymphocyte Separation Medium (LSM, MP Biomedicals) and LeucoSep separation tubes (Greiner Bio-One) and resuspended in RPMI containing 10% FBS and penicillin/streptomycin. Cells were counted on the Attune N×T flow cytometer (Thermo Fisher) using propidium iodide staining to exclude dead and apoptotic cells. Cell were then adjusted to the appropriate concentration of live cells for subsequent analysis. For each monkey in the studies, T cell responses were measured using ELISpot or flow cytometry methods. T cell responses to 6 different rhesus macaque Mamu-A*01 class I epitopes encoded in the vaccines were monitored from PBMCs by measuring induction of cytokines, such as IFN-gamma, using ex vivo enzyme-linked immunospot (ELISpot) analysis. ELISpot analysis was performed according to ELISPOT harmonization guidelines {DOI: 10.1038/nprot.2015.068} with the monkey IFNg ELISpotPLUS kit (MABTECH). 200,000 PBMCs were incubated with 10 uM of the indicated peptides for 16 hours in 96-well IFNg antibody coated plates. Spots were developed using alkaline phosphatase. The reaction was timed for 10 minutes and was terminated by running plate under tap water. Spots were counted using an AID vSpot Reader Spectrum. For ELISPOT analysis, wells with saturation >50% were recorded as “too numerous to count”. Samples with deviation of replicate wells >10% were excluded from analysis. Spot counts were then corrected for well confluency using the formula: spot count+2×(spot count×% confluence/[100%−% confluence]). Negative background was corrected by subtraction of spot counts in the negative peptide stimulation wells from the antigen stimulated wells. Finally, wells labeled too numerous to count were set to the highest observed corrected value, rounded up to the nearest hundred.
Specific CD4 and CD8 T cell responses to 6 different rhesus macaque Mamu-A*01 class I epitopes encoded in the vaccines were monitored from PBMCs by measuring induction of intracellular cytokines, such as IFN-gamma, using flow cytometry. The results from both methods indicate that cytokines were induced in an antigen-specific manner to epitopes.
Immunogenicity in Rhesus Macaques
This study was designed to (a) evaluate the immunogenicity and preliminary safety of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA 30 μg and 100 μg doses as a homologous prime/boost or heterologous prime/boost in combination with ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer; (b) compare the immune responses of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA in lipid nanoparticles using LNP1 versus LNP2; (c) evaluate the kinetics of T-cell responses to VEE-MAG25mer srRNA and ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer immunizations.
The study arm was conducted in Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques to demonstrate immunogenicity. Select antigens used in this study are only recognized in Rhesus macaques, specifically those with a Mamu-A*01 MHC class I haplotype. Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques were randomized to the different study arms (6 macaques per group) and administered an IM injection bilaterally with either ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer or VEE-MAG25mer srRNA vector encoding model antigens that includes multiple Mamu-A*01 restricted epitopes. The study arms were as described below.
PBMCs were collected prior to immunization and on weeks 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 after the initial immunization for immune monitoring.
Results
Antigen-specific cellular immune responses in peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were measured to six different Mamu-A*01 restricted epitopes prior to immunization and 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, and 10 weeks after the initial immunization. Animals received a boost immunization with VEE-MAG25mer srRNA on weeks 4 and 8 with either 30 μg or 100 μg doses, and either formulated with LNP1 or LNP2, as described in Table 21. Combined immune responses to all six epitopes were plotted for each immune monitoring timepoint (
Combined antigen-specific immune responses were observed at all measurements with 170, 14, 15, 11, 7, 8, 14, 17, 12 SFCs per 106 PBMCs (six epitopes combined) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10 weeks after an initial VEE-MAG25mer srRNA-LNP1(30 μg) prime immunization, respectively (
Combined antigen-specific immune responses were observed at all measurements with 1218, 1784, 1866, 973, 1813, 747, 797, 1249, and 547 SFCs per 106 PBMCs (six epitopes combined) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, or 10 weeks after an initial ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer prime immunization, respectively (
33 ± 28.1
2 ± 2.4
1 ± 1.8
3 ± 1.1
1 ± 1.7
15 ± 13.5
40 ± 17.6
3 ± 3.1
13 ± 13.2
22 ± 19.5
Non-GLP RNA Dose Ranging Study (Higher Doses) in Indian Rhesus Macaques
This study was designed to (a) evaluate the immunogenicity of VEE-MAG25mer srRNAat a dose of 300 μg as a homologous prime/boost or heterologous prime/boost in combination with ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer; (b) compare the immune responses of VEE-MAG25mer srRNA in lipid nanoparticles using LNP1 versus LNP2 at the 300 μg dose; and (c) evaluate the kinetics of T-cell responses to VEE-MAG25mer srRNA and ChAdV68.5WTnt.MAG25mer immunizations.
The study arm was conducted in Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques to demonstrate immunogenicity. Vaccine immunogenicity in nonhuman primate species, such as Rhesus, is the best predictor of vaccine potency in humans. Furthermore, select antigens used in this study are only recognized in Rhesus macaques, specifically those with a Mamu-A*01 MHC class I haplotype. Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques were randomized to the different study arms (6 macaques per group) and administered an IM injection bilaterally with either ChAdV68.5-WTnt.MAG25mer or VEE-MAG25mer srRNA encoding model antigens that includes multiple Mamu-A*01 restricted antigens. The study arms were as described below.
PBMCs were collected prior to immunization and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 weeks after the initial immunization for immune monitoring for group 1 (heterologous prime/boost). PBMCs were collected prior to immunization and 4, 5, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 weeks after the initial immunization for immune monitoring for groups 2 and 3 (homologous prime/boost).
Results
Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques were immunized with ChAdV68.5-WTnt.MAG25mer. Antigen-specific cellular immune responses in peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were measured to six different Mamu-A*01 restricted epitopes prior to immunization and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 or 24 weeks after the initial immunization (
Mamu-A*01 Indian rhesus macaques were also immunized with VEE-MAG25mer srRNA using two different LNP formulations (LNP1 and LNP2). Antigen-specific cellular immune responses in peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) were measured to six different Mamu-A*01 restricted epitopes prior to immunization and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15 weeks after the initial immunization (
312 ± 129.7
119 ± 51.2
1616 ± 491.7
104 ± 53.1
46 ± 27.1
43 ± 38.8
76 ± 44.8
28 ± 19.5
49 ± 30.2
42 ± 26.8
57 ± 44.7
70 ± 69.2
srRNA Dose Ranging Study
In one implementation of the present invention, an srRNA dose ranging study can be conducted in mamu A01 Indian rhesus macaques to identify which srRNA dose to progress to NHP immunogenicity studies. In one example, Mamu A01 Indian rhesus macaques can be administered with an srRNA vector encoding model antigens that includes multiple mamu A01 restricted epitopes by IM injection. In another example, an anti-CTLA-4 monoclonal antibody can be administered SC proximal to the site of IM vaccine injection to target the vaccine draining lymph node in one group of animals. PBMCs can be collected every 2 weeks after the initial vaccination for immune monitoring. The study arms are described in below (Table 30).
g.
Immunogenicity Study in Indian Rhesus Macaques
In one implementation of the present invention, vaccine studies can be conducted in mamu A01 Indian rhesus macaques to demonstrate immunogenicity. In one example, Mamu A01 Indian rhesus macaques can be administered an IM injection with a ChAdV and/or srRNA vector encoding model antigens that includes multiple mamu A01 restricted antigens. In another example, an anti-CTLA-4 monoclonal antibody will be administered SC proximal to the site of IM vaccine injection to some of the groups. PBMCs can be collected every 2 weeks after the initial vaccination for immune monitoring. The study arms are described in below (Table 31).
XIX. Identification of MHC/Peptide Target-Reactive T Cells and TCRs
T cells can be isolated from blood, lymph nodes, or tumors of patients. T cells can be enriched for antigen-specific T cells, e.g., by sorting antigen-MHC tetramer binding cells or by sorting activated cells stimulated in an in vitro co-culture of T cells and antigen-pulsed antigen presenting cells. Various reagents are known in the art for antigen-specific T cell identification including antigen-loaded tetramers and other MHC-based reagents.
Antigen-relevant alpha-beta (or gamma-delta) TCR dimers can be identified by single cell sequencing of TCRs of antigen-specific T cells. Alternatively, bulk TCR sequencing of antigen-specific T cells can be performed and alpha-beta pairs with a high probability of matching can be determined using a TCR pairing method known in the art.
Alternatively or in addition, antigen-specific T cells can be obtained through in vitro priming of naïve T cells from healthy donors. T cells obtained from PBMCs, lymph nodes, or cord blood can be repeatedly stimulated by antigen-pulsed antigen presenting cells to prime differentiation of antigen-experienced T cells. TCRs can then be identified similarly as described above for antigen-specific T cells from patients.
Sequences for vectors, cassettes, and antibodies are shown below.
This application is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/612,352, filed Nov. 8, 2019, now issued as U.S. Pat. No. 11,504,421, which is the National Stage of International Application No. PCT/US2018/031696, filed Aug. 5, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/590,163, filed Nov. 22, 2017, U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/523,201, filed Jun. 21, 2017, and U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/503,283, filed May 8, 2017, the entire contents of each is incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 62590163 | Nov 2017 | US | |
| 62523201 | Jun 2017 | US | |
| 62503283 | May 2017 | US |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Parent | 16612352 | Nov 2019 | US |
| Child | 18045812 | US |
